Tải bản đầy đủ (.docx) (250 trang)

ga av 8 moi

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1 MB, 250 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>

<b>Teaching date: 23/8/2011 </b>


<b>Period 1 : </b>

<b>ôn tập và kiểm tra đầu năm</b>


<b>I./. Objectives</b>


- By the end of the lesson, sts will able to revise the structures and vocabulary
which they have learrnt English 7.


- Students know how to learn the English 8
<b>II./. Language content:</b>


Vocabulary and structures in grade 7
<b>III./. Teaching aids.</b>


- book, exercise book, cards, pictures
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings:


- Checking attendance:
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


- Review 3 tenses
- Adv of tense ?
- Verbs ?


- Example
- Negative ?



- Change 2 sentences into negative


- Interrogative?


- Change 2 sentences into interogative
- Adverbs ?


- Verbs ?
- Example
- Negative


- Change 2 sentences
- Interogative ?
- Change 2 sentences
- Adverbs ?


- Verbs ?
- Example


1, The present progressive tense
adv: now, at the moment


Verbs: am/ is/ are + Ving


a, Mai and Hoa (skip) rope now.
b, I (teach) English at the moment.


<b>-</b> Add “not” behind am/ is/ are
Ex: Mai and Hoa arenot skipping


I am not teaching English at the
moment.


<b>-</b> Change is/ am/ are in front of S


2, The simple future tense
adv: next, tomorrow, tonight
Verb: am/ is/ are going to + V
will + V
+ Nga (watch) T.V tonight.
+ They (go) to school tomorrow.


<b>-</b> Add “not” behind Be or Will
- change Be or Will in front of S
3, The past simple tense


adv: last, yesterday, ago
Verbs: Be – was/ were
Can – Could
Ordin – Ved/ V2


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

- Negative ?


- change 3 sentences
- interrogative ?
- change 3 sentences


- How many modal verbs have you
learnt?



- What are they?
- How to use?
- Negative?
- Interrogative?


-Retell how to use comparatives and
superlatives


Test : 10'


<b>-</b> She (drink) milk yesterday
<b>-</b> Nam (play) soccer two day ago.
(-) Be/ can: Add “not” behind


was/were


Ordin : Add “didn’t” in front of V
(?) Be/can: change were/was/could in
front of S


Ordin: Add “did” in front of S + V
4, Modal verbs


*form : Modal + V
(- ) Add "not" behind modal
(?) Change Modal infront of S
5, Comparatives.


Adj Comparatives Superlatives
Good better the best


Small smaller the smallest
Beautiful more beautiful most
beautiful


* The use of adj/adv.


* Put the verb in correct form


1,My mother (go) to work yesterday
2,Students (play) games now


3,Nga (do) her home work tonight
4, She (wash) her clother last night
* Translate


1, Hoa thông minh nhất lớp cơ ấy
2, Chúng tơi đã có thể đi xe đạp 2 năm
trớc đây


<b>Home work : - Guides Sts how to learn English 8</b>
- …. .. .."…….."… prepare next lesson


<b>Teaching date: 24/8/2011</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

<b>Lesson 1: Getting started-Listen and read </b>


<b>I./. Objectives</b>


- By the end of the lesson, sts will able to know more about Hoa, Lan, Nien
and to review simple present and simple past tense.



<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocabularies: seem +adj, next door neighbor, look like, smile, enough
- Strusture: adj + enough + to V


<b>III./. Teaching aids.</b>


- book, picture, cards, stereo, tape, gap fill chart, drawing
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greeting


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


<b>1, Warm up:</b>


- Word storm : Write the activities you
like doing in your free time.


- Asks Sts to look at the picture and asks
some questions:


+What are the children in picture (a) doing?
+Where are they ?


+Are they all boys ?



+What time of the day do you think it is ?
- in the picture (a) you can say: These boys
like playing soccer.


- Asks Ss to work in pair (ask and answer
the same about the action in other picture)
- T asks Ss some questions about


themselves:


+ Do you like playing soccer ?


+ When do you often play soccer? Where ?
Who do you often play with ?


<b>2, Presentation</b>


- Asks some questions about Hoa
+ Where is Hoa from?


+ How old is she ?


+ Who is she staying with now?


- Introduces the content of the dialogue
( Hoa and Lan are talking about Hoa's
friend, Nien)


<b>I, Getting started</b>



a, These boys like playing soccer.
b, These girls like studying together
c, These two boys like playing chess
d, These girls enjoy playing


volleyball


<b>I, Listen and read</b>


New words


<b>-</b> To seem (+adj ) (v)
<b>-</b> Next door neighbor (n)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

- Listen to the tape


<b>-</b> Find new words and read them
<b>-</b> Make sentences with newwords and


the structure
<b>3, Practice</b>


<b>-</b> Listen and repeat following the tape
(twice)


<b>-</b> Ss read in pairs (2’) silently


<b>-</b> Some pairs of Ss read before class (6
pairs)



<b>-</b> T guides how to answer question c
<b>-</b> Work in pair ( 2’)


<b>-</b> calls some pair to practice asking
and answering before class


<b>-</b> some Sts write the answers on the
board


<b>4, Further practice</b>


<b>-</b> Asks s to do exercise “Correct
mistakes”


<b>5, Home work : </b>


<b>-</b> To look like (v)
<b>-</b> Smile (n, v)
 Structure:


Ex:She wasn’t old enough to be in
my class


- S + be(not) + Adj + enough + to V


1, Practice the dialogue with a
partner


2, Answer the following questions


a, Nien/(she) lives in Hue


b, No, she doesn’t know her


c,”She wasn’t old enough to be in
my class”


d, She is going to visit Hoa at
Christmas


<b>-</b> Exercise: “T”or “F”.Correct
mistakes:


a, Nien was Hoa’s next-door
neighbor in Hue


b,Nien is thirteen years old


c,Nien will visit Hoa at Christmas
d, Lan knows Nien, too


<b>-</b> Lean by heart new words
<b>-</b> Read and translate the


dialogue


<b>-</b> Prepare speak ( guides how to
prepare)


<b>Date of teaching : 25/8/2011 </b>



<b>Period 3 </b>

:

<b>Unit 1:</b>

<b>My friends</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

<b>I./. Objectives</b>


- By the end of the lesson, sts will able to describe some one and complete the
dialogue by listening


- Practicing listening and speaking skill
<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocab : Blond , build , straight , curly , bold , dark
- Structure : Review simple present of to be / to have
<b>III./. Teaching aids.</b>


- book, pictures, cards, stereo, tape,
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greeting


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


<b>1) Warm up : </b>
+) Checking:


<b>-</b> S1 :Write the describled adjectives


<b>-</b> S2 : Read and translate the dialogue
<b></b>


<b>-2, Pre-speaking</b>


Introduces about the content of the lesson
(describle people in order to regconize
them)


- Give some more adjectives of description
- Read the new words


- T introduces the guessing game( guess a
person through description)


- Guides Ss to read the dialogue twice
- Some Sts read again


- Review how to use the verb “to be” and
“to have”.


<b>3, While - speaking </b>


<b>-</b> Work in silence (2’)<sub> ( describle the </sub>
person in the picture using the
words given)


<b>-</b> Calls some Ss to describle and the
others guess



<b>4, Post-speaking</b>


- Asks Some Ss describe one of their


<b>I. Speak</b>


1) Read the dialogue
New words


blond (adj)
build (adj)
straight (adj)
curly (adj)
bald (adj)
dark (adj)


-to be : thi , la , (ta dang voc)
Ex: He is tall and thin


- to have : co (toc , da )
Ex: He has short black hair.


2) Now take turns to make similar
dialogues- use the adj in the table
Hoa : This person is short and thin
She has long blond hair
Lan : Is this Mary?


Hoa : Yes.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

classmates and the others guess


*Pre-listening


- Asks Ss to retell some phrases used to
introduce


- Sts read in silence all the phrases given
and 4 dialogues


<b>-</b> Sts guess how to complete
*While-listening


- listen to the tape ( 3 times )
- St gives the answers.


- Listen again once more to correct.


*Note: Một số cách đối đáp khi đợc giới
thiệu


* Post -listening<b> : </b>


Some pairs of Sts introduce and respond


<b>5) Home work :</b>


He has curly hair
B: Is this Long ?
A: Yes.



<b>II. Listen : </b>


1) I’d like you to meet
2) Nice to meet you
3) I’d like you to meet


4) It,<sub>s a pleasure to meet you .</sub>
5) Come and meet.


6) How do you do?
<b>-</b> Nice to meet you


<b>-</b> The pleasure is all mine
<b>-</b> How do you do ?


Ex:


A: I'd like you to meet my teacher
B: Nice to meet you


C: Nice to meet you, too.
- learn by heart adjectives.
- Do exercise 1,2 (work book )
- Guides how to prepare period 4


<b>Date of teaching: 30/8/2011 </b>


<b>Period 4 </b>

<b> Unit 1: </b>

<b>My friends</b>


<i>Lesson 3. Read</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

By the end of the lesson Sts can understand the content of the lesson and answer
the questions about the characters, hobbies of Ba’s friends


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocab : Character , sociable , generous , orphanage , unlike , reserved , joke,
sense of humor , annoy , out going .


- Structure : Review simple present.
<b>III./. Teaching aids.</b>


- book, pictures, cards, stereo, tape,
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greeting


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


<b>1, Warm up :</b>
*Checking


- Write new words.
- Describe people.
<b>2, Pre – reading</b>



- Asks Ss some questions :
+ Have you any close friends?
+ Describe about him or her ?


- T introduces about the content of the
lesson ( The writer are going to introduce
about some close friends of his)


- Asks Ss to tell some adj to describe the
characters


- T gives some newwords
- Practice new words


<b>3, While reading</b>


- Read in silence to answer the following
questions:


+ How many close friends does Ba have?
+ What are they like?


+ What do they like?


+ What do they enjoy doing in their free
time ?


- Ss read and answer above questions (5’)
- Asks Ss to read exercise 1 and choose
the best answer.



<b>-</b> Some Ss give the answers


<b>I. New words:</b>
Character (n)
sociable (adj)
Generous (adj)
Orphanage (n)
Unlike >< like
Reserved (adj)
Joke (n,v)


sense of humor (n)
Annoy (v)


Outgoing (adj)


1, Choose the best answer and write
a, A b, C c, B d,D
2, Answer the questions :


a) Ba feels lucky having a lot of
friends


b) Bao is the most sociable
c) Khai likes reading


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

<b></b>


<b>--</b> Read the text again in silence (5')


and find the answer for each
question


<b>-</b> Some pairs of Ss practice asking
and anwering before class


- Some Sts write the answers on the
board


- Corrects mistakes.


-Some sts read again the answers
- Read the text again once more


<b>4, Post-reading :</b>


Sts can describe their close friends.( T
may give some prompts)


<b>5, Home work :</b>


e) Bao spends his free time doing
volunteer work at a local orphanage
f) We have different charaters


- Sociable / enjoy playing sport/ watch
every football match / help another.


- Learn by heart New words
- Describe your close friend


- Prepare writing.


<b>Date of teaching: 31/08/2011 </b>


<b>Period 5 </b>

<b>Unit 1:</b>

<b>My friends</b>


<i>Lesson 4. </i><b>write</b>


<b>I, Objectives : </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocab : elder , humorous


- Grammar : Review the simple present of to be and to have.
<b>III./. Teaching aids.</b>


- book, pictures, cards,
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greeting


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


<b>1, Warm up</b>


S1 : Describe one of your friends


S2 : write new words


<b>2, Pre - writing :</b>


- T introduces about Tam


-Asks Sts to read the information about
Tam and compare with the passage
bellow


<b>-</b> T asks some questions about Tam:
+ How old is Tam ?


+ Where does he live ?
+ What is he like ?


+ Who are his close friends ? (etc…)
- T explains how to do E.x 2


<b>3, While writing :</b>


<b>-</b> Sts write the information about
your partner like part 1


( T asks Ss to retell the adjectives of
description)


- Asks Ss to work in pairs (ask and write
the information about your partner)
- One Ss writes on the board



- Corrects mistakes


<b>4, Post - writing :</b>


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to depend on the above
form to write a paragraph


1, Read the information about Tam


2, Fill in a simillar form for your
partner


Name : Nguyen Thi Mai Age :14
Appearance : Short, small, curly hair
Characters : reserved , shy


Address: 18 Chu van An, Lao Cai
Family : Mother, father, sister
Friends : Nga, Hoa


3, Write a paragraph


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

(T repeat how to use “to be”and “to
have” )


- Ss work in pairs (3’)


- Calls 2 Ss to write on the board
- Corrects mistakes.



- T asks some questions about the content
of the paragraph (if have time).


<b>5, Homework : </b>


Chu van An Lao Cai with her mother,
father and sister. She is short , small
and has curly hair. She is reserved
and shy.Her close friends are Nga and
Hoa


- Write a paragraph about yourself
- Guides ss to do Ex 7 (page 11)
- Prepare language focus


<b>Date of teaching: 9/9/2011 </b>


<b>Period 6 </b>

<b>Unit 1:</b>

<b>My friends</b>


<i>Lesson 5. Language focus</i>
<b>I, Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson Sts can use the simple present and simple past.
<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocab : set , rise , sun , east , west , planet , earth , moon , Mars , Mercury
- Grammar : - Review 2 simple tenses


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

<b>III./. Teaching aids.</b>



- book, picture , cards, gap fill chart, drawing
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greeting


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


<b>1) Warm up : </b>


+ Write a paragraph to describe your
partner


<b>2, Practice :</b>


- Shows the poster on the board
- Ask sts to find adv of time in each
paragraph and retell how to use the verb
in 2 simple tenses


- work in pair (4')


- 2 Ss come to the board, the others read
before class


- Corrects mistakes
- 2 Ss read again



* Ask sts to translate this title
- T explains how to complete
- T reads for sts find New words
- Practice New words


- Some sts read again


- Work in pairs (2')
- 2 sts come to board


- One pair of sts read the dialogue once.
- repeat the use of the simple present
* Ask sts to look at the picture


- Explains how to answer 2 questions b,
c and give example


- Work in pair (2')


- 3 pairs of sts ask and answer (3
questions for once )


1, Complete the paragraphs. Use the
correct form of the verbs


a) (1), lives / is living
(2), sent


(3), Was


(4), Is


b) (1), Are (2), Came
(3), showed (4), introduced
2, Complete the dialogue. Use the
correct form of the verbs in the box .
You will have to use some verbs more
than once


* new words


sun (n) planet (n)
rise (v) Earth (n)
set (v) Moon (n)
east (n) Mars (n)
west (n) Mercury (n)
(1) sets (4) is
(2) goes (5) is
(3) moves (6) is


* The present simple tense is used to
talk about general truths


3, Look and describe:
a) There are four


b) The man standing near the car is tall
and fat , he has short black hair; The
woman is tall and slim, she has curly
black hair .



- The boy is tall and thin


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

- T corrects mistakes


-Asks some questions about Ss in class
- what does Mi look like?


- What is she wearing ?
* Translate this title


<b>-</b> Explains how to use:
+ adj + enough + to V
+ not adj + enough + to V
- Work in silence (2')
- 3 pairs of sts read again


<b>3, Production</b>


- Asks Ss to do exercise
- Combine into one = enough


<b>4, Home work :</b>


short and big . He has short black hair .
c) The man is wearing yellow shirt ,
black trousers and black shoes.


- The woman is wearing a red blouse
and



green skirt.


- The man standing in front of the bus
stop is wearing a pink shirt and blue
trousers


- The boy is wearing blue shorts and a
white shirt.


4, Complete the dialogues use (not) adj
enough.


Hoa: Can you put the groceries in your
bag?


Lan: No. It is not big enough to carry
everything


b) not old enough
c) strong enough
d) good enough


- S + be (not) + adj enough + to V + O
* Ex: Combine these sentences:


+Lan is not tall.She can't play
basketball


+ Mr Ba is careful . He can drive a taxi


* Exercise: Correct mistakes:


a, The sun doesn’t rises in the west
b, Hoa receives the letter from Nien
yesterday.


- Learn by heart New words .


- Guides Ss to do Ex 1,2 (page 5,6), -
Prepare unit 2(getting started + listen
and


<b>Date of teaching: 06 /9/2011 </b>


Period 7

<b>Unit 2</b>

:

<b>Making arrangements</b>



<i>Lesson 1. Getting started + Listen and read</i>
I./. Objectives:


By the end of the lesson sts can read and understand the content of the dialogue .
and answer the questions.


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocab : fax , machine , mobile phone , answering machine , telephone directory ,
downstair , outside , introduce , a bit


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

- Skills : Listening , reading
<b>III./. Teaching aids.</b>



- book , chalk , picture , cassette , tape
<b>IV./. Teaching procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greeting


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


1, Warm up


- Ask sts to look at the picture and name
each picture in Vietnamese


<b>-</b> Sts guess how to match each
object with its name


<b>-</b> T introduces the newwords
<b>-</b> Corrects


- Practice new words
2, Presentation


- Introduces the content of the lesson
? What will you say if you are the caller ?
If you pick up the phone to answer it?
- Listen to the tape once



- Find new words
- Practice new words


-*Note : -Structures


-Retells how to use the present
continuous in future


3, Practice :


- Read following the tape ( twice)
- Read in pairs (2')


<b>-</b> Some pairs read again


<b>-</b> T asks some yes/no questions
about Nga and Hoa


- Ss work in silence to decide who did
there things (3')


- Words in pairs. (each pair asks and
answers)


I,Getting started
New words


- fax machine (n)
- Mobile phone (n)



<b>-</b> Telephone directory (n)
<b>-</b> Answering machine (n) =


massage machine.


II, Listen and read :
1, New words :
- Downstairs (adv)
- Abit (adj)
- Outside (adv)
- To make the call
- Introduce (v)
- Hold on


- Where is it on ?


- I'm using ... tonight
- Is 6.30 all right?


2, Practice the dialogue with a
<b>partner.</b>


3. Read the dialogue again . Decide
who did and said each of the following
things.


a) Nga made the call
b) Nga introduced herself



c) Nga invited the other to the movies
d) Nga arranged a meeting place.
e) Hoa arranged the time.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

4, Further


- Tick " T " or " F "


5, Home work :


4.Exercise : T or F
+ Nga phoned to Hoa


+ Hoa invited Nga to the movies
+ Hoa arraged the time at 6.30.
- Learn by heart new words.
- Read and translate the dialogue
- Prepare speak + listen.




<b>Date of teaching:07/9/2011 </b>


<b>Period 8 Unit 2 </b>

:

<b>Making arrangements</b>



<i>Lesson 2</i>. Speak + Listen
I, Objectives<b> :</b>


By the end of the lesson students can use the phone to make and confirm
arrangements and listen and get message on the phone



<b>II./. Language content:</b>
- Vocab : message


- Grammar : Review the future with be going to.
<b>III./. Teaching aids.</b>


- Book, extra board,…
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

- Greeting


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


1, <b>Warm up</b>


+ Chatting


- Talk to Ss to about using telephone .
1. Do you have a telephone at home ?
2. How often do you make a phone
call ?


3. What would you say when you pick
up the phone to answer it ?


4. What would you say if you are the


caller ?


2. Pre- speaking


- Ask Ss to do exercise 1 in pairs to put
the sentences in the correct order to
make a complete conversation .
- Call on some pairs to read their
answers and write them on the board :
- Call on some pairs to practice the
conversation they have arranged .
-Ask Ss some questions to check
Ss,<sub>understanding and focus on the </sub>
structure GOING TO


a. Are they talking on the phone ?
b. What do they intend to do ?


c. What time are they meeting ?Where ?
d. What form of the verbs do you use to
talk about intentions ?


=> Express an intention
3. While - speaking :


- Set the scene “ Ba and Bao are
making arrangements to play chess “
- Ask Ss to work with partners to
complete the dialogue .



- Call on some pairs to play the roles of
Ba and Bao to practice the dialogue .
- Listen and give feedback


- Ask Ss to make the similar


<b>A. Speak</b>


1, Put the sentences below in the correct
order to make a complete conversation
* Answers : 1-b 2-f


3-j 4-a
5-i 6-c
7- e 8- k


9-g 10- h
11- d


+ Yes , they are


+ They intend to go to the pop concert
+ They are meeting inside the center at
7.15


+ be going to


=> S + BE + GOING TO +
INFINITIVE



2, Complete the dialogue.Practice the
dialogue and then make similar
arrangements.


Ba : Hello . 8257012


Bao : May I speak to Ba , please . This
is Bao .


Ba : Hello , Bao . How are you ?
Bao : I am fine . Thanks , and you ?
Ba : Great . Me too.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

arrangements and practice talking with
a partner


4. Post – speaking :


- Ask Ss to make sentences with “
Going to + Infinitive “


a. see a movie ( Yes )
b. play / sports ( No )


c. meet your friends ( Yes)
d. help your mother ( Yes )
e. do your homework (No)
f. watch TV ( No )


- Model two cues , then ask Ss to repeat


chorally then individually .


- Ask some Ss to practice asking and
answering in pairs .


* Pre- listening :


- Asks Ss to read the message form and
explains the demand of the exercise
:This is a conversation between the
woman and the secretary of Kingston
Junior High School.You’ll listen and
answer the following questions :
+ What is the woman’s name?
+ What did she want to do ?
+ When ?


+ What’s her telephone number ?


- T gives some newwords and guides Ss
to read


* While - listening :


- -Listen to the tape (3 times to get one
by one)


- Compare the answers with the partner
- Give the answers.



- Listen again to correct mistakes
- Fill in the form


tonight . I am going to do my homework
Bao : What about tomorrow afternoon ?
Ba : Tomorrow afternoon is fine .


Bao : I will meet you at the Center
Chess Club .


Ba : At the Central Chess Club ? Ok .
Let ,<sub>s meet at the front door .</sub>


Bao : Is 2,00 o,<sub>clock OK ? </sub>


Ba : Great . See you tomorrow afternoon
at 2.00 o,<sub>clock . </sub>


Model sentences :


<b> +Are you going to see a movie ?</b>
-Yes , I am.


+ Are you going to play sport?
- No, I am not.


<b>B/ Listen</b>
- message (n)


<b>-</b> leave the message


<b>-</b> to be out


<b>-</b> appointment (n)
<b>-</b> available (adj)


<b>Kingston junior high</b>
<b>school</b>


Date : ...Time : ...
For : The principal


Message : Mrs Mary Nguyen wanted to
<i>see you at 9 . 45 in the morning</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

* Post - listening :


- Ask Ss to make a dialogue about the
information they have heard


- Go around the class and help them .
- Call on some pairs to practice the
dialogue they have made .


V- Homework :


-Copy the dialogue above .


-Do exercise ( ...) in workbook
-Prepare the next lesson .



<b>Date of teaching: /9/2011</b>


<b>Period 9 </b>

<b>Unit 2</b>

:

<b>Making arrangements</b>



<i>Lesson 3</i>.Read


<b>I, Objectives.</b>


By the end of the lesson sts can understand the content of the lesson about
Alexander and his invention


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocab : Deaf- mutes , experimenting , transmitting , assistant , conduct, device ,
demonstrate , countless , exhibition , emigrate.


- Grammar : Review simple past; to be born.
<b>III./. Teaching aids.</b>


- book , chalk , cassette , tape.
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greeting


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

2, Pre - reading


- Asks Ss to look at the picture and
answer some questions:


+ Who's it ?


+ What did he invent ?
+ When did he invent it ?


<b>-</b> listen to the tape ( twice)
<b>-</b> find newwords


- Give the meaning of new words
- Practice New words


3, While - reading :


- Explains how to do Exercise 1


- Sts read in silence (5') to do exercise
1 in pairs


- some Ss give the results.
- corrects mistakes.


- T explains how to do exercise 2.
- Sts work in silence (3')


- Sts give sesults.


- Corrects mistakes


- T asks Ss to read all the sentences in
exercises 1,2


4, Post - reading :


- Asks some good Ss to retell something
about Alexander G.Bell


5, <b> Home work :</b>


* Read<b> : </b>
New words :
- Emigrate (v)
- Deaf- mutes (n)
- Experiment ( n)
- Transmit (v) :
- lead- led (v) :
- assistant (n):
- conduct (v):
- device (n):
- demonstrate (n):
- countless (adj):
- exhibition (n):


1,True or false? Correct the false
sentences


a) F in Edinburgh ( Scotland).


b) F deaf-mutes at Boston
University


c) T


d) F 1876


e) F over a long distance (bo between)
f) T


2, Put the events in the correct order
1- d: Alenxander was born in
Scotland.


2 - e: He went to live in Canada
3 - a:He went to live in the United
States


4 - g: He worked with people who
could neither speak nor hear.


5 - g: He worked with Thomas Watson
6 – f: He invented the telephone


7 - b: He successfully demonstrated his
invention.


*Example:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

- Learn by heart New words


- Read and translate the text


- Prepare write .(guides how to write).


<b>Date of teaching: 13/9/2011 </b>


<b>Period 10 </b>

<b>Unit 2</b>

:

<b>Making arrangements</b>


<i><b>Lesson 4. Write</b></i>


I, Objectives<b> :</b>


By the end of the lesson sts can write a message from the dialogue .
<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocab : Customer, delivery, service , midday , reach , stationery.
- Grammar : Review simple past.


<b>III./. Teaching aids.</b>
- book, chalk
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greeting


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


1, Warm up :



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

- Read and translate the text
2, <b> Pre- Reading :</b>


- Translate the title


- Asks Ss to read the passage and find
new words


- Practice New words
- Some sts read alone .


- T guides how to do exercise 1
3, While - Writing


- Sts work in silence (5')


- calls some Ss come to the board and fill
in the blanks.


- Corrects mistakes .


- Calls one S to read the passage again


- Explains the demand of the exercise
- Ss read the passage in silence (5') then
write the message in pairs.


- calls one by one to write each
information



- Corrects mistakes


- Some sts read again the telephone
message


- Translate the title .


<b>-</b> T asks Ss to read the message in
part 1 again.Then read the


dialogue in silence and answer
these questions:


+ Who phoned for Nancy?
+ What did he want to do ?
+ Who took the message ?
- Sts work in pairs (5')


<b>-</b> calls some Ss to write the message
on the board.


<b>-</b> T corrects mistakes
4, Post - Writing :


- Call on some Ss to read their answers


1, Read the message. then fill in the
<b>gaps in the passage...</b>



New words :


Customer (n) Khách hàng
delivery (n) Sự giao hàng


service (n) Sự phục vụ, dịch vụ
midday Giữa ngày, giữa tra
reach (v) Tới , đến


deliver (v) Phân phối, phát
taken by (part) Đợc nhận bởi
stationery (n) Văn phòng phẩm


1, phone / called 2, May 12
3, speak 6, delivery
4, took 7, Mr Ha / him
5, name 8, at


2, Now read the passage . Write the
<b> telephone message . </b>


Date: June 16


Time: After midday
For: Mrs Van


Message: Mr Nam called about his
stationery order . He wants you to call
him at 8. 634 082 .



Taken by: Mr Toan.


3, Read the massage . Then help Lisa
<b>write a message for Nancy . Use the </b>
<b>information from the dialogue.</b>
Date: (tù ®iÒn)


Time: (...)
For: Nancy


Message: Tom called about playing
tennis this afternoon. He'll come over
to pick you up at 1.30'.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

aloud


- Correct and give feedback
5,Homework<b> : </b>


- Write a message for your friend


<b>Date of teaching: /9/2011 </b>


<b>Period 11 </b>

<b>Unit 2 </b>

:

<b>Making arrangements</b>


<i><b>Lesson 5. Language focus</b></i>


I.Objective


- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about intentions


with “ Be going to” and know how to use Adverbs of place


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocabulary: action monies, fishing rods….
- Grammar: Be going to, adverbs of place
<b>III./. Teaching aids.</b>


- Textbooks , card
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greeting


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


*Warm up :
- Chatting


1 / Grammar and practice


1.Talk about intentions with going to :
<i>Introduce the form and use of going to</i>


“What are you going to do this
weekend?”



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

- Ask Ss to do exercise 1 . They
have to work with a partner and
say what the people are going to
do


- Call on some pairs to read their
sentences aloud .


- Correct and give feedback :


a) Ask Ss to work in pairs


- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in
front of class .


- Listen and give feedback .
b) Get Ss to work in pairs


- Have some pairs demonstrate in front
of class .


- Ask sts to work individually , one
student one word


- Give feedback .


- Let Ss work individually , one student
one word.


- Ask Ss to go to the board and write the


meanings words .


- Call on some Ss to read all the adverbs
aloud .


- Set the scene : “ Ba is playing hide and
seek with his cousin , Mr Tuan . use the
adverbs of place to complete the speech
bubbles”


- Let Ss work in pairs , then compare
with another pair ( at their table )


- Call on some Ss to read out the speech
bubbles


- Call on some Ss to read the complete
sentences


- Use : express an intention
+ Notice: go/ come-> we use present
progressive to talk about intentions
Ex 1 :


- Example :


T : Nga has a movie ticket . What is she
going to do ?


S : She is going to see a movie .


a. They are going fishing


b. She is going to read the new model
c. She is going to do her homework .
d. He is going to watch an action movie
on TV tonight .


e. She is going to give him a birthday
present .


Ex 2 : Complete the list( Questionnaire)
+ Are you going to see a movie?


Play sports?
+ What is she going to do on the
weekend?


- She is going to help her mother


2. Adverbs of place
* Jumbled words


1. tdeousi = outside
2. siiden = inside
3. hetre = there
4. erhe = here
5. stupairs = upstairs
6. wonstaird = downstairs


Ex 3 : Complete the speech bubbles .


Use each adverb in the box once .
a. Where is Tuan ? I think he is upstairs
b. No , he is not here .


c. He is not downstairs and he is not
upstairs .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

*Homework f. I am not outside . I am inside , Ba.
Read the complete sentences aloud .


- Copy the complete exercises in their
notebooks .


- Write six sentences about your house ,
using adverbs of place .


- Prepare the next lesson .


<b>Date of teaching: /9/2011 </b>


<b>Period 13 </b>

<b> Unit 3</b>

:

<b>At home</b>



<i>Lesson 1. </i>Getting started + Listen and read
<b>I, Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson sts can understand the content of the lesson and write the
things which Nam has to do.


<b>II./. Language content:</b>



- Vocab : Chore, make the bed, sweep the floor, tidy up, feed, cupboard, steamer,
sauce pan, frying pan, no problem


- Grammar : Review modal verb : have to / ought to.
<b>III./. Teaching aids. </b>


- Picture , book , chalk , tape , casstte .
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greeting


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


1,Warm up<b> : </b>


-T shows the picture and asks some
questions:


+ What is she doing ?


+ Is she doing the washing up ?(etc)
- Gives some new words.


- read newwords in chorus.
- Some sts read alone.



<b>-</b> Asks Ss to answer some T’s
questions:


+ What do you have to do at home ?


I, Getting started:


Write the chores you often do at home
*New words.


- chore (n)


- make the bed (v)
- sweep the floor (v)
- tidy (dust) (v)
- feed (v)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

+ Do you have to cok meals?/ feed the
chicken?…


- Asks Ss to depend on the picture and
write about their chores.


- Work in pairs(2’).


- Some Ss write on the board.
- Corrects mistakes


- Some Sts make sentences.
2, Presentation<b> :</b>



<b>-</b> T introduces the situation of the
dialogue: This is a conversation
between Nam and his mother, Mrs
Vui. You’ll listen to the tape and
answer this question :


+ What are they talking about?
- Ss listen and find newwords.
- Practice newwords


- Rubs out newwords and remember
3, Practice.


<b>-</b> plays the tape again, Ss listen and
repeat


<b>-</b> asks Ss to read in pairs(2’)
<b>-</b> some pairs of Ss read again.
<b>-</b> T asks some questions about the


content of the dialogue


+ Why is Nam’s mother going to be
home late tonight?


+ Will Nam have to cook dinner tonight?
+ What does he have to do? Write the list
of the thingshe has to do.



- work in silence (2') and answer above
question


- T reminds how to use Modal: ought to /
have to.


- Sts write on the board the list of the
things which Nam has to do.


- corrects mistakes
4, Production.
Tick "T" or "F"


- T reminds how to use Modal ought to /
have to .


5, Home work<b> : </b>


c, Sweeping the floor.
d, Cooking.


e, tidying up the table.
f, feeding the chickens.
Ex:


I often wash the dishes/do the washing
up


I have to look after my brother (etc)



II, Listen and read .


- Cupboard (n)
- Steamer (n)
- Saucepan (n)
- Frying pan (n)
- No problem (exp)


1,Practice the dialogue


2, Complete the list of the things Nam
has to do .


<b>-</b> cook dinner
<b>-</b> go to the market


<b>-</b> buy some fish and vegetables
<b>-</b> call Aunt Chi to meet his


mother at Grandma’s house


*Exercise: Answer true or false
1. Nam and his mother are going to
visit his grandma.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

- Learn by heart new words.
- Read and translate the dialogue .
- Guides Ss to do exercise 1,2 (page
20,21- SBT)



- Prepare Speakinging


<b>Date of teaching:21 /9/2011 </b>


<b>Period 14 </b>

<b>Unit 3</b>

:

<b>At home</b>


<i><b>Lesson 2. Speak</b></i>
I, Objectives :


By the end of the lesson, Ss can talk about the position of each item and
arrange the furniture in the room.


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocab : rug , plate , counter , calender, dish rack, above.
- Grammar : Review simple present.the


<b>III./. Teaching aids. </b>
- picture, book,…
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greeting


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


1, Warm up<b> : </b>
- word-storm



2, Pre - Speaking.


- Asks SS to look at the picture and say
the name of each item in the picture
- Gives some new words.


- Guides Ss to read newwords
- T gives example .


- T explains how to use "above"






Prepositions of place


1, Look at the picture. Work with a
partner. Talk about the position of each
item


- Calender (n) - above (prep)
- Plate (n) - Counter (n)
- Dish rack (n) - rug (n)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

3, While- Speaking .
- Work in pair (2')


- Each sts gives sentence with each


picture.


- T explains how to do


- Ask Ss to read the example in the book
- Work in pairs and decide preposition of
each furniture .(3')


- Some pairs practice before class.


4, Post- speaking


- Asks Ss to arrange the things which
they have in class


5, <b> Home work </b> :


+ The cupboard is on the wall, above
the counter.


+ The knives are on the wall, under the
cupboard.


2,Mrs Vui... Work with a partner and
arrange the furniture .You must reach
an agreement.


Ex: Let’s put the coffee table between
the couch and the armchair



-O.K. And I think we should put the
magazines on the shelf, above the
books (etc)


Ex: Let's put the pens and pencils in
the box.


O.K.And I think we ought to put the
box in the school bag. (etc)


- Learn by heart New words


- Guides Ss to do exercise 7( page 26-
SBT)


- Prepare listening




<b>Date of teaching: 22/9/2011 </b>


<b>Period 15 </b>

<b>Unit 3</b>

:

<b>At home</b>



<i><b>Lesson 3. Listen + Language focus 3</b></i>.
I, Objectives :


By the end of the lesson sts can listen the content of dialogue and check the
right item.


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocab : Garlic, ham.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

- book , chalk , cassette , tape.
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greeting


- Checking attendance


B. New lesson


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


1, Warm up<b> : </b>


- Write the position of 2 items in the class
2, Pre - listening :


- T intruduces the content of the lesson
- Sts guess how people cook " Special
Chinese Fried Rice"


- Asks Ss to say the name of the things in
the picture.


- Gives newwords


- Read newwords in chorus.
- Read alone.



3, <b> While - listening </b>
- Listen to the tape twice


- Listen again part by part and check
- Sts compare with partner


- Some Ss give the result


- listen to the tape again to check the
answers


- T ticks " T " or " F "


- Finally, asks Ss to retell how to cook the
“ Special Chinese Fried Rice ”


4, Post - listening
- Translate this title


- T explains how to use and the position of
reflexive pronouns, then gives some
examples


- Guides Ss how to complete the dialogue
- Ss work in pairs (2')


- calls some Ss give the answers
- Corrects mistakes



<b>-</b> one or two pairs of sts read again


* Listen .


Look at the pictures. Check the right
item


New words
- garlic (n)
- ham (n)
a, Fried rice
b, pan


c, garlic and green pepper
d, ham and peas


*Exercise:


+ Lan fried rice in the frying pan
+ She put a little oil in, then fried the
garlic and onions


+ She put the ham and peas in it.
+ She put the rice and some salt in
3, Complete the dialogue . Use the
reflexive pronouns in the box
* Reflexive pronouns: are used to
emphasize the meaning of the noun or
the pronoun



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

5, <b>Home work</b> :


b, Myself e, Herself
c, Yourself f, Themselves
g, Yourselves
- Write the formula to cook the fried
rice


- T guides Ss how to prepare Read.


<b>Date of teaching: 27/09/2011 </b>


<b>Period 16 UNIT </b>

<b>3</b>

:

<b>At home</b>


Lesson 4. Read


I, Objectives<b> :</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can understand the content of the lesson about safety
precautions in the home.


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocab : chemical, drug, lock, match, destroy, injure, cover, cause a fire, electrical
socket, kill, reach, bead.


- Grammar : Review Modal verb:
<b>III./. Teaching aids. </b>


- Book, chalk, poster
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>



<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greeting


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


1, Warm up :


? Who's absent today


-Write how to cook the " Special Chinese
Fried rice "


2, Pre – reading


- Asks Ss some questions :


+ What can be dangerous to small
children in the house?


+ What will happen if children play with
these things ?


+ What must we do to protect children?
- When Ss answer, T gives some


newwords and guides Ss to read


newwords


- Then,T introduces about the content of
the lesson.


- Asks sts to read the poster (2')in silence
and find the sentences which have the
same with their ideas and the other ideas


* Reading
<i><b>New words </b></i>
- scissors (n)
- chemical (n):
- drug (n):
- match (n):


- electrical socket (n):
- bead (n):


- destroy (v)
- injure (v)
- cause a fire (v):
- kill (v)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

in the lesson


- some Ss give the answer.


- T explains some newwords (if have)
3, While reading :



- Explains the demand of the exercise
- Sts read in silence (2') and correct
mistakes in pairs


- some Ss give the answers
- Corrects mistakes.


- Sts read the poster again and the
example in the book


- T guides how to answer.


- Sts work in silence (2') in pairs


- calls 4 Ss to write the answers on the
board. The others practice in pairs
- Corrects mistakes


- T emphasizes how to use Modal verb:
must and mustn’t


4, Post - reading


- Asks Ss to say something about the
safety precautions in the home
5, Home work :


- lock (v): kho¸



1. Answer :True or false. Correct the
false sentences.


a, F: It's safe to keep/ put all chemicals
and drugs in locked cupboards.


b, T


c, F: A kitchen is a dangerous place to
play


d, F: Playing with one match can cause
a fire.


e, T
f, T


2, Ask and answer.


b, Because the kitchen is a dangerous
place.


c, Because matches can cause fires.
d, Because children can put something
in them.


e, Because these things can hurt and
injure them or even kill them.


- Learn by heart New words +


Summarize the lesson


- Guides Ss to do exercise 5,6 (page
24,25-SBT)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>

\


<b>Date of teaching: /10/2011 </b>


<b>Period 1 7 </b>

<b>UNIT </b>

<b>3</b>

:

<b>At home</b>


<i><b>Lesson 5. Write</b></i>



I, Objectives<b> : </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can write a description of a room
<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocab : Wardrobe, folder, stove, oven, towel rack, beneath, jar, flour, lighting
fixture, vase.


- Grammar : - Review structure : There is / are...
- Review prepositions of place.


- Skill : Writing
<b>III./. Teaching aids. </b>


- Picture, book , chalk...
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>



<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greeting


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


1, Warm up :


? Who's absent today
- Write newwords


- Word storm: write the prepositions of
place


2, Pre - writing :


- Asks Ss to read the passage in silence
(2’) and find newwords


- Look at the picture and say the position
of each item in the room


- T reminds the use of the structure: There
is/ are...


3, While - Writing :


- Asks Ss to look at the picture and say the


name of each item in the kitchen (T gives
some newwords)


- Sts read all the words given first. Then
depend on the words given and the picture
to write the description of the kitchen





prepositions


1, Read the description of Hoa's room
- Wardrobe (n)


- Folder (n)


Ex:There is a bed in the middle of the
room


Or: In the middle of the room, there is
a bed.


2, Now write a description of this
kitchen


- stove (n)
- oven (n)
- flour (n)



- lighting fixture (n)
- beneath (n)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

- Prepare in (5') in pairs


- calls one by one to write sentence by
sentence on the board.


- Corrects mistakes.


4, Post - writing :
- Some Ss read again


- Guides Ss to write a description of a
room in their house ( refer to the
paragraph 1,2)


- T reminds how to use structure: there is/
are , preposition of place


5, Home work :


- vase (n)


+ This is Hoa's kitchen


+ There is a refrigerator in the right
corner of the room.


+ Next to the refrigerator, there is a


stove and an oven


+ On the other side of the oven ,there
is a sink and next to the sink is a towel
rack.


+ The dish rack is on the counter, to
the right of the window and beneath
the shelves


+ On the shelves and on the counter
beneath the window, there are jars of
sugar, flour and tea.


+ In the middle of the kitchen , there is
a table and four chairs .


+ The lighting fixture is above the
table, and beneath the lighting fixture
is a vase of flowers.


3. Write a description of a room in
your house.


- Write a description of a room in your
house.


- Learn by heart the newwords
- Prepare Language focus



<b>Date of teaching: /10/2011 </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

I, <b> Objectives :</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can know how to use reflexive pronouns; Modals :
must, have to , ought to; ask and answer with Why- Because


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocab: Empty, garbage , fail, repairman, cry, experiment.
- Grammar: - Reflexive pronouns,


- Modals : must, have to, ought to; question Why - answer
- Skills : Speaking - Writing


<b>III./. Teaching aids. </b>


- Book, chalk, picture, poster.
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greeting


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


1, Warm up<b> : </b>



<b>-</b> write newwords
2, Presentation


- T reminds the use and the form of:
Must / have to and ought to


3, Practice


- T shows picture in exercise 1 and asks Ss
to give a verb-phrase for each pictrure.
- gives some newwords


- Guides Ss to use: have to / must and one
of the verbs in the box to fill in each
blank.


- Calls one by one to give the answers
- T corrects mistakes


- Some pairs of sts read the dialogue
again


- Explains the demand of the exercise
- Asks Ss to look at the picture and read
the example


- Sts work in silence (2’)


- calls some Ss to come to board and write
down. The others read their sentences


before class


- Corrects mistakes


- Translate the title


<i>1, Look at the picture. Complete the </i>
<i>dialogue </i>


<b>-</b> empty (v)
<b>-</b> garbage (n)
<b>-</b> tank (n)


(1) I have to tidy my bedroom
(2) I have to dust the living-room.
(3) I have to sweep the kitchen floor.
(4) I have to clean the fish tank.
(5) I have to empty the garbage
(6) I have to feed the dog


<i>2, Look at the picture. use “ought to”</i>
<i>to give advice to these people </i>


Ex : I failed my English test
 you ought to study harder.
b, You ought to get up earlier
c, You ought to eat much fruit and
vegetables


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

- Asks Ss to look at the picture and read


the example a)


- Ss depend on the situation of each


picture to make question and answer with
Why..?/ Because…


- Work in pairs (2')


- calls some pairs of Ss to practice asking
and answering


4, Production


- Asks Ss to do exercise


5,<b> Home work : </b>


c, Why was Mrs Vui home late ?
Because she had to come to see
Nam's grandmother, she was sick.
d,Why did Ha fail her English test ?
Because she played the computer
games


e,Why didn’t Nga go to the movies ?
Because she had to do her chores
<i>*Exercise:Corrects mistakes:</i>
a, I must to do my homework
b, I clean my room ourselves


c,Why did she had to go to the
dentist ?


Because her tooth ached
* Review for the test:


<b>-</b> Simple present, simple past,
simple future tenses;


<b>-</b> structure Enough + to V;
<b>-</b> write the desciption about


people and the room;
<b>-</b> Modal verbs;


<b>-</b> Question with Why - because
*Prepare: Getting started + listen and
read (unit 4)


<b>Date of teaching: /10/2011 </b>


<b>Period 19 </b>

<b>Revision</b>



I, <b> Objectives :</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can know how to use reflexive pronouns; Modals :
must, have to , ought to; ask and answer with Why- Because


<b>II./. Language content:</b>
- Vocab:



- Grammar: - Reflexive pronouns,


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

- Modals : must, have to, ought to; question Why - answer
- Skills : Speaking - Writing


<b>III./. Teaching aids. </b>


- book, chalk, picture, poster.
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greeting


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


<b>1, Warm up </b>


– Who’s absent today?


ask students to repeat the uses and the
form.


- Ask sts to make sentences with this
structure


- Ask sts to make sentences with enough



- Ask sts to repeat the usage and the
form


Is


Are + going + toinfinitive
Am


<b>2. Practice.</b>


a. doesn’t go
b. is going to write
c. visited


d. learning/ to do
e. rires


<i><b>I. Grammar</b></i>


1. present simple tense( to talk about
general truths)


Ex: The earth moves around the sun
The sun rises in the east and sets in
west.


2. (not) + adjective + enounh +
to-infinitive



Ex: My son isn’t old enough to go to
school


3. Talk about intention with “BE GOING
TO”


Ex: Hoa has a movie ticket


 She’s going to see a movie


+ There is an interesting film on T.V
tonight


 We are going to see it tonight
1. Reflexive pronouns:


2. Modals: Must, Have to, Ought to
9 in language focus 3)


II. Practice


<b>Exercise1: Give the correct tense</b>


a. Mr Nam( not go) to work on Sundays.
b. He (write) a letter to her friends
tonight


c. Lan’s parents( visit) her last month
d. Lonh is good at( learn) math. He is
clever enough(do) this exercise.



e. The sun (rise) in the east


<b>Exercise 2: Rewrite the sentences</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

1.This worker ought to get up early
2. I’m not old enough to drive a car
3. She is happy enough to have many
relatives


4. The fire isn’t hot enough to boild the
kettle


<b>3. Homework</b>


2. I’m fifteen years old. I can’t drive a
car ( enough)


3. She is happy because she has many
relatives ( enough)


4. The fire isn’t hot. It won’t boild the
kettle( enough)


- Revise all grammar structures the first
written test




<b>Date of teaching:/10/2011 </b>



<b>Period 20</b>

<b>Test 45 minutes</b>



I,Objectives


– Check the following knowledge
+ The simple tenses


+ Structure: Enough + to-V
+ Reflexive pronouns
+ Modal verbs


II, <b>Content: </b>


<i><b>I.Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others:</b></i>


1. A. dark B. father C. car D. principal


2. A. visited B. wanted C. locked D. needed


3. A. mute B. humor C. music D. public


4. A. brown B. however C. know D. town


5. A. curly B. fry C. library D. lucky


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

A. gets B. getting C. got D. to get
7. My mother …….. go to work ar 6.30 because her office is far from home.


A. should to B. must C. ought D. have to



8. You must not let children play in the kitchen because it a … place .
A. suitable B. beautiful C. dangerous D. safe
9. There is a wardrobe on the right … the room.


A. of B. at C. to D. for


10. Alexander G.Bell … first to Canada and then to the USA in the 1870s.
A. emigrating B. emigrate C. emigrates D. emigrated
11. Lan isn’t downstairs. She’s …. .


A. upstairs B. insides C. outsides D. beside


12. We are going … the movie Dream City tomorrow morning.


A. see B. to see C. to seeing D. sees


13. Nien wasn’t … … to be in Hoa’s class.


A. enough old B. enough age C. age enough D. old enough
14. My parents will be home late this evening. I’ll have to cook dinner … .


A. meself B. myshelf C. myself D. meshelf


15. You must put all the chemicals and drugs in locked … .


A. refrigerators B. cupboards C. counters D.washing machines
16. You are too fat. You … to eat more vegetables and fruit. You … to eat too
much meat.



A. ought / ought B. ought not/ ought not
C. ought / ought not D. ought not / ought
17. Let me … you with your housework.


A. help B. to hep C. to helping D. helping


18. You………to make sure children do not play with matches.


A. have B. must C. has D. should
19. Her brother…………born in Hanoi in 1992


A. is B. was C. are D. were
20. He spends his free time…………volunteer work at a local orphanage
A. do B. doing C.does D.to do
<b> III. Read the following passage, then answer the questions. </b>


Alexander Graham Bell was born in Edinburgh, Scotland on March 3, 1847.
Later he emigrated to Canada and then to the USA in the 1870s. In America,
he worked with deaf- mutes at Boston University. Soon, Bell started


experimenting with ways of transmitting speech over a long distance. Bell and
his assistant, Thomas Watson, conducted many experiments and finally
they invented the telephone in 1876. Bell traveled all over America to
demonstrate his invention to the public and by 1877 the first telephone was
in commercial use.


21. When was Alexander Graham Bell born?


………
22. Did he move to the USA in the 1870s?



………
23. Where did he work with deaf- mutes?


………
24. Who was Bell’s assistant?


………
25. Did Bell invent the telephone in 1877?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>

<b>IV. Rewrite these sentences. Using “enough”</b>
26. He is strong. He can carry the box.


<b> ...</b>
27. The weather wasn’t warm. We couldn’t go swimming.


<b> ...</b>
28. The fire isn’t very hot. It won’t boil the kettle.


<b> ...</b>
29. The ice is quite thick. We can walk on it.


<b> ...</b>
30. The ladder wasn’t very long. It didn’t reach the window.


<b> ...</b>
<i><b>V. Identify the mistake in each of the following sentences:</b></i>


31.It is not safe leaving small objects around the house.
A B C D



32.I think she oughts to get up earlier.
A B C D


33.He didn’t get the job because he wasn’t enough experienced.
A B C D


34. Would you like visiting my hometown at Chritmas ?
A B C D
35. Can I speak with Mr Lam, please?


A B C D


<b>Date of teaching: /10/2011 </b>

<b> </b>



<b>Unit 4:</b>

<b>Our past</b>



<b>Period 21</b> <i><b>Lesson 1</b></i>. Getting started + listen and read


I, Objectives<b> : </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to tell about something which people used
to do in the past


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocab:look after, great-grandma, equipment, light-lit, folktale, traditional
- Grammar : Review simple past; Structure: used to + V



- Skills : Listening - speaking
<b>III./. Teaching aids. </b>


- Text book, pictures, tape recorder....
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greeting


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


1, Warm up :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

write the names the things that do not
belong to the past


- Ss work in pairs (2’)


- calls 2 Ss write down on the board
- Correct mistakes


- Asks Ss some questions:


+ Do you have a mobile phone ?
+ Do you have to wear school
uniforms(etc)



2, Presentation<b> : </b>


- T introduces about the content of the
lesson( Nga’s grandmother is telling her
about her past. You’ll listen to the tape
and find out what Nga’s grandmother
used to do in the past )


- Plays the tape, Ss listen and answer this
question


- Explains some newwords :
- Practice newwords :


- Rubs out and remember newwords


- Explains new structure


- Guides Ss to make some sentences


3, Practice<b> : </b>


- Have ss listen to the dialogue (once)
- Read following the tape (twice)
- Work in pairs (2’)


- Some pairs of Ss read again.


- Asks Ss to read the dialogue again and


then read all the questions to find the
answers


<b>-</b> Ss work in pairs (2’)


<b>-</b> Some pairs practice asking and
answering


<b>-</b> Some Ss write the answers on the
board


<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes


Look at the picture . Write the name of
things that do not belong to the past
- Television(n)


- Stereo(n)


- Mobile phone (n)
- Uniform (n)


- Lighting fixture (n)
- Shoes (n)


II, Listen and read


<b>1. New words:</b>
- used to (v)



- Great - grandma (n)
- Great - grandfather (n)
- equipment (n)


- light - lit – lit (v)
- folktale (n)
- traditional (adj)
<i><b>*Structure</b><b> :</b><b> </b></i>


Ex: I used to live on a farm …
- S + used to + V


(chØ thãi quen trong QK)


<b>2, Practice the dialogue with a </b>
<b>partner</b>


3,Ask and answer:


a, Nga's grandmother used to live on a
farm.


b, Because she had to stay at home and
help her Mom. She used to look after
her younger brothers and sisters
c,Nga’s Great-grandma used to cook
meals, clean the house and wash the
clothes


d, Nga's Great-grandma lit the lamp


and her Great-grandfather used to tell
them stories.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

4, Production:


- Explains about fact and opinion
Fact : This flower is red


Opinion : It's the most beautiful flower
- Work in silence (2)


- Sts write on the board
- Corrects mistakes
5,Homework :


4, Fact or opinion?
a- F c- F e- O
b- F d- F f- O


- learn by heart newwords ; read and
translate the dialogue


- guides Ss to do exercise 1(page 27)
- prepare speak + language focus 4


<b>Date of teaching: /10/2011 </b>


<b>Unit 4:</b>

<b>Our past</b>



<b>Period 22</b> <i><b>Lesson 2</b></i>. Speak + Language focus 4


I, Objectives :


By the end of the lesson Ss can talk about the way things used to be and the way
they are now


<b>II./. Language content:</b>
- Vocab : revision


- Grammar : Structure: used to + V
- Skill : Speaking


<b>III./. Teaching aids. </b>


- Picture, book, chalk...
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greeting


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


1, Warm up :


- Write New words :


- say the things Nga’s Grandma used to do



<b>2,Pre - speaking : </b> <b>I/ Speaking</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

- T guides how to talk about the way
things used to be and the way they are
now ;


- Repeats how to use “used to” ( Negative,
interrogative of used to )


<b>3,While - speaking</b>


- Look at the picture in getting started
again and the pictures page 40


- Work in pairs (5’)


- One by one shows the picture and talk
about our past and nowadday


-Explains the demand of the exercise
-T gives example


-Asks Ss to tell some activities they used
to do last year


- Ss work in pairs (2')


- some Ss say about their habit in the
past



<b>4, Post speaking</b>


- repeats the structure: used to + V
- guides Ss how to do


- Ss work in pairs (2')
- some Ss give the answers
- Corrects mistakes


- Some pairs of Ss read again
5,Homework:


<b>be and the way they are now. </b>


Ex: People didn't use to have a mobile
phone . Now many people have a
mobile phone .


- People used to use oil lamps, now
they use electrical lamps.


(+) S + used to + V + O
(-) S + didn’t use to + V + O
(?) Did + S + use to + V + O ?


a, People used to live in small houses ,
now people live in big houses or


building



b, People used to walk , now they can
go by car or motorbike


c,There wasn’t electricity in the home.
Now there is electricity everywhere
(etc)


<b>2. Now tell your parter about the </b>
<b>things you used to do last year.</b>
Ex: Last year I used to get up late.
Now, I get up early and do morning
exercises.


- Last year, I used to get bad marks.
Now, I don't get bad marks.


- I used to play soccer after school .
Now, I play marbles and volleyball.
- I didn’t use to drink coffee in the
morning. Now I drink it every morning
<b>II/ Language focus 4</b>


4, Look at the picture, complete the
dialogue. Use “ used to ” and the verbs
in the box.


(1) Used to have
(2) Used to be
(3) Used to live



- Write 5 sentences about the way
things used to be and the way they are
now


- Prepare Listen and language focus 1,
2, 3


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

<b>Date of teaching: /10/2011</b>

<b> </b>



<b>Unit 4:</b>

<b>Our past</b>



<b>Period 23</b> <i><b>Lesson 3</b></i>. Listen + Language focus 1, 2, 3
I, Objectives :


By the end of the lesson Ss can listen to the tape and write the letter of the most
suitable moral lesson


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocab : foolish, greedy, gold, lay/ laid, discover, cut open, shout, in amazement,
unfortunately, dead


- Grammar : Structure: Past simple
- Skill : Listening


<b>III./. Teaching aids. </b>


- Picture, book, chalk...
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>



<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greeting


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


<b>1, Warm- up</b>


- have ss play a game


<b>2, Pre - listening :</b>


- T introduces about the content of the
lesson


- Introduces some newwords .
- Practice New words


- Some Ss read again.


<b>Brainstorming</b>


What did you use to do last year?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

- T gives 4 names of the story and guides
Ss how to do.


- T gives some questions and asks Ss to


listen to the tape and answer them.
+ What did the farmer do when he


discovered one of his chicken laid a gold
egg ?


+ What did his wife want ?


+ Could he find any more gold eggs when
he cut open all the chickens ?


+ Is the farmer very foolish? What about
his wife ?


+ Why do you think so ?
<b>3, While - listening </b>


- Listen to the tape 3 times


- listen again and answer the questions
- Choose the suitable title of the story.
- Listen again once more


4, Post - listening


- Ss retell the content of the story
- Give the lesson from this story.
- T retells the lesson from the story
- Write the past simple form of each verb
- Correct mistakes



- Repeats the form of the simple past
- T guides how to complete the dialogue
- Ss work in pairs (2')


- some Ss write the answers on the
board


- the others work in pairs
- Corrects mistakes


- T explains how to use the prepositions


- Shout (v)
- amazement (n)
- cut open (v)
- Dead (a)
- Foolish (a)
- Greedy (a )


<i><b>2. Listen then choose the most</b></i>
<i><b>suitable moral lesson for the story:</b></i>
*Key : b, don't be foolish and greedy


<b>II/ Language focu 1, 2, 3</b>


<i>1, Write the past simple form of each </i>
<i>verb</i>


flew went did rode sat


took had was/were ate came
<i>2, Complete the dialogue below. Use </i>
<i>the past simple </i>


a, Lan : Did you eat rice for lunch ?
b, Nam : I got to school by bike
I went there by bike
c, Where were you yesterday ?
d, I had Math (English, Biology )
in + Month / year


on + date month


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

- Ss work in pairs (2')


- some Ss give the answers
- Corrects mistakes


5,Homework :


<i>3, Complete the sentences. use the </i>
<i>preposition in the table.</i>


b, in


c, between
d, at - after
e, before


- learn by heart newwords ; do


exercises into workbook.


- prepare read


<b>Date of teaching: /10/2011 </b>

<b> </b>



<b>Unit 4:</b>

<b>Our past</b>



<b>Period 24</b> <i><b>Lesson 4</b></i>. Read


I, Objectives<b> : </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can understand the content of the story
“The Lost Shoe "


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocab : Die, marry, cruel, upset, fairy, appear, broken heart, prince, rag,
drop, fall in love


- Grammar : Review simple past
- Skills : Reading


<b>III./. Teaching aids. </b>
Book, chalk...
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greeting



- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


1, Warm up :
- Write New words


- Tell your class a traditional story you
know in English.


2, Pre - reading


- T introduces the content of the lesson and
asks Ss some questions:


+ Do you know this story ?


+ Can you guess the content of the story
from the title?


<b>1. New words:</b>
- die (v)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>

- when Ss guess, T may give some
newwords


- practice the newwords
- some Ss read again



- check vocabulary “ slap the board”


3, While-reading
- Read in chorus once


- Read in silence (5') to complete the
sentences with the words from the story
- Some Ss give the words to complete each
sentence.


- Corrects mistakes


- T guides Ss how to answer 5 questions
- work in pairs (3’)


- some pairs of Ss ask and answer
- Some Ss write on the board
- corrects mistakes


4, Post reading


- Ss read again all the answers
- Summarize the story


5,


<b> Homework</b>


- upset (adj)


- broken heart (n)
- fairy (n)


- appear(v)


- change ...into (v)
- rag (n)


- drop (v)


- fall in love with :


2. Complete the sentences
a, Farmer d,Marry/choose
b, Died e, New clothes
c, Has ..again f, lost


2, Answer the questions


a, Little Pea was a poor farmer's
daughter


b, She made Little Pea do the clores
all day


c, A fairy appeared and magically
changed her rags into beautiful
clothes.


d, The prince decided to marry the girl


who fitted the lost shoe


e, No, it isn't. There is a fairy in the
story


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

<b>Date of teaching: /10/2011 </b>


<b>Unit 4:</b>

<b>Our past</b>



<b>Period 25</b> <i><b>Lesson</b><b>5. Write </b></i>
I, Objectives :


By the end of the lesson, Ss can write the story using the words given
<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocab : burn, escape, tie, graze, wisdom, straw, stripe,
- Grammar : Review simple past


- Skill : writing
<b>III./. Teaching aids. </b>


Book, chalk, extra board,…
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greeting


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>



<b>T’s and Ss’ Activities</b> <b>Content</b>


1, Warm up :
- Write Newwords


- Retell story " The lost shoe "
2, Pre - writing :


- Ss read the story in silence and tell the
title of story.


- Retell the story in Vietnamese
- T gives some newwords
- Practice New words
- Some Ss read again.


- T guides sts how to complete.


<b>1,New words:</b>
- burn (v)
- escape (v)
- tie (v)
- graze (v)
- stripe (n)
- servant (n)
- wisdom (n)
- straw (n)
- master (n)


<b>2. Complete the story. Use the verbs </b>


<b>in the box.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

3, While - writing
- Ss work in pairs (3')


- Ss write the answers on the board
- Corrects mistakes


- guides Ss to depend on the story above to
complete the sentences


- Ss work in pairs (5')


- calls one by one to write on the board .
- Corrects mistakes


- Some Ss read again this story


4, Post- writing


- Some Ss retell the story
5, <b> Homework :</b>


2, was 6, tied
3, said 7, lit
4, left 8, burned


2, Now imagine you are the man .Use
the words to write the story. Start like
this:



One day as I was in the field and my
buffalo was grazing nearby, a tiger
came. It asked why the strong buffalo
was my servant and I was its master. I
told the tiger that I had something
called wisdom. The tiger wanted to
see it, but I told it I left the wisdom at
home . Then I tied the tiger to a tree
with a rope because I didn't want it to
eat my buffalo. I went to get some
straw and I burned the tiger


The tiger escaped, but today it still has
black stripes from the burns.


- learn by heart newwords
- retell the story


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

<b>Date of teaching: / 10/ 2011</b>


<b>Period 26</b> -

<b>Correcting the mistakes in the test </b>



I,<b>Objectives</b>


– Check the following knowledge
+ The simple tenses


+ Structure: Enough + to-V
+ Reflexive pronouns


+ Modal verbs


<b>II. Procedure:</b>


<i><b>I.Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others:</b></i>
<b>1điểm: (0,2đ cho mỗi câu đúng)</b>


1. A. dark B. father C. car D. principal


2. A. visited B. wanted C. locked D. needed


3. A. mute B. humor C. music D. public


4. A. brown B. however C. know D. town


5. A. curly B. fry C. library D. lucky


<i><b>II. Choose the best answer (A,B,C or D) to complete the sentences bolow:</b></i>
<b>3điểm: (0,2đ cho mỗi câu đúng)</b>


6. She usually … up very early.


A. gets B. getting C. got D. to get


7. My mother …….. go to work ar 6.30 because her office is far from home.


A. should to B. must C. ought D. have to


8. You must not let children play in the kitchen because it a … place .
A. suitable B. beautiful C. dangerous D. safe


9. There is a wardrobe on the right … the room.


A. of B. at C. to D. for


10. Alexander G.Bell … first to Canada and then to the USA in the 1870s.
A. emigrating B. emigrate C. emigrates D. emigrated
11. Lan isn’t downstairs. She’s …. .


A. upstairs B. insides C. outsides D. beside


12. We are going … the movie Dream City tomorrow morning.


A. see B. to see C. to seeing D. sees


13. Nien wasn’t … … to be in Hoa’s class.


A. enough old B. enough age C. age enough D. old enough
14. My parents will be home late this evening. I’ll have to cook dinner … .


A. meself B. myshelf C. myself D. meshelf


15. You must put all the chemicals and drugs in locked … .


A. refrigerators B. cupboards C. counters D.washing machines
16. You are too fat. You … to eat more vegetables and fruit. You … to eat too
much meat.


A. ought / ought B. ought not/ ought not
C. ought / ought not D. ought not / ought
17. Let me … you with your housework.



A. help B. to hep C. to helping D. helping


18. You………to make sure children do not play with matches.


A. have B. must C. has D. should
19. Her brother…………born in Hanoi in 1992


A. is B. was C. are D. were
20. He spends his free time…………volunteer work at a local orphanage
A. do B. doing C.does D.to do
<b> III. Read the following passage, then answer the questions. </b>


<b>2,5điểm: (0,5 cho mỗi câu đúng)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

Later he emigrated to Canada and then to the USA in the 1870s. In America,
he worked with deaf- mutes at Boston University. Soon, Bell started


experimenting with ways of transmitting speech over a long distance. Bell and
his assistant, Thomas Watson, conducted many experiments and finally
they invented the telephone in 1876. Bell traveled all over America to
demonstrate his invention to the public and by 1877 the first telephone was
in commercial use.


21. When was Alexander Graham Bell born?


………
22. Did he move to the USA in the 1870s?


………


23. Where did he work with deaf- mutes?


………
24. Who was Bell’s assistant?


………
25. Did Bell invent the telephone in 1877?


………
<b>IV. Rewrite these sentences. Using “enough”</b>


<b>2,5điểm: (0,5 cho mỗi câu đúng)</b>


26. He is strong. He can carry the box.


<b> ...</b>
27. The weather wasn’t warm. We couldn’t go swimming.


<b> ...</b>
28. The fire isn’t very hot. It won’t boil the kettle.


<b> ...</b>
29. The ice is quite thick. We can walk on it.


<b> ...</b>
30. The ladder wasn’t very long. It didn’t reach the window.


<b> ...</b>
<i><b>V. Identify the mistake in each of the following sentences:</b></i>



<b>1điểm: (0,2đ cho mỗi câu đúng)</b>


31.It is not safe leaving small objects around the house.
A B C D


32.I think she oughts to get up earlier.
A B C D


33.He didn’t get the job because he wasn’t enough experienced.
A B C D


34. Would you like visiting my hometown at Chritmas ?
A B C D
35. Can I speak with Mr Lam, please?


A B C D


<b>III-Results:</b>


<b>Class</b> <b>Total</b> <b>0-4</b> <b>5-6</b> <b>7-8</b> <b>9-10</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

<b> Date of teaching:20/10/2011</b>



<b>Unit 5 : Study habits</b>



<b>Period 27</b> Lesson 1. Getting started + listen and read
<b> </b>


I, <b>Objectives :</b>



By the end of the lesson, Ss can understand the content of the dialogue, and
know how to say reported speech


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocab :Report card, excellent, proud of, believe, semester, improve,
pronunciation,


- Grammar : Reported speech
- Skills : Listening, reading
III, <b>Teaching aids</b> : Textbook, chalk,..
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1, <b>Warm up</b> :


- Ss rewrite their schedules (2')
- T guides Ss to ask and answer
- Work in pairs


- Some pairs ask and answer
2, <b>Presentation </b>:



- Introduces the content of the dialogue
- Plays the tape first


- T gives some questions:
+ Is Tim a good student ?


+ What were Tim and his mother talking
about?


- Ss find newwords
- Practice newwords
- Some Ss read alone.


- T explains how to use the reported
speech


3, <b>Practice </b>


- listen to the tape again


- Ss read following the tape ( twice)
- Work in pairs (2')


- Asks Ss to read in silence again (2') to do
exercise


- Ss work in pairs (2')


- Asks some Yes- No questions



Ex: Was Tim out when his mother called
him ? No, he wasn’t. (etc)


I, <b>Getting started</b>


Ex:


S1: How often do you have English/


Math


S2: I have English 3 times a week


Math 5 times a week
II, <b>Listen and read</b>


*New words:
- Report card (n)
- Excellent ( adj)
- Proud of (adj)
- Semester (n)
- Improve (v)
- Pronunciation (n)
- Believe (v)


* Miss Jackson said you should work
harder on your Spanish pronunciation
1, Practice the dialogue with a partner


2, True or false? Check (v) in the box


a, - F


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

- some Ss give the answers
- corrects mistakes


- Asks Ss to read all the questions ans
read the dialogue again to find the
answers


- Work in pairs (2’)


- Some pairs ask and answer


- Some write the answers on the board


4, <b>Production</b>


- Retell the content of the dialogue
- T reminds reported speech


5, <b>Homework</b>


f, - T


3, Answer the questions


a, Miss Jackson is Tim's teacher .
b, She gave Tim's mother his report
card.



c, Tim worked very hard this semester.
d, Miss Jackson said Tim should work
harder on his Spanish pronunciation.
e, She gave him a dictionary


- learn by heart newwords
- read and translate the dialogue
- prepare Speak+Listen


<b>Date of teaching: / /2011</b>


<b>Unit 5 : Study habits</b>


<b>Period 28</b> Lesson 2. Speak + Listen



I, <b>Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about their studying,


Ss can listen and understand about the personal information and studying result
<b>II./. Language content:</b>


-Vocab : Day present, behavior, making period, co-operation, comment, signature.
participation, satisfactory, fail


- Grammar : Review simple present
- Skill : speaking , listening


III, <b>Teaching aids</b> : Book, chalk ...
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>



<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1, <b>Warm up</b>


- Write newwords


- Read the text and answer questions


<b>2. Speak</b>


<b>Pre - speaking</b> :


- Asks to read all the questions
- Guides how to answer


<b>I. Work in groups.Ask each other about </b>
<b>your studies.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

<b> While - speaking</b>


- Work in pairs (5')
- T asks some Ss first



- Calls some pairs to ask and answer
- Corrects mistakes


<b>Post - speaking</b> :


- Asks Ss to say something about their
studying habit


- then, asks Ss to say about their
partner’s studies.


<b>3. Listen</b>


<b>Pre - listening :</b>


- Ss read the information in the card
- Find the new words


- Practice new words


- Asks Ss to guess how to complete


<b>While - listening</b>


- Listen to the tape (3 times) and
complete


- Check with a partner
- Give the answer keys



- Listen sentence by sentence to check
- Corrects mistakes


<b>Post - listening</b>


- Asks some questions about the
dialogue:


+ How many days was Susan absent ?
+ How is her speaking and reading ?
- some excellent Ss tell about their
studying


<b>4. Homework</b>


2.Who helps you with your homework ?
- My parents help me with my homework
My brothers / My friends


3. How much time do you spend on Math?
- I spend half an hour on Math.


an hour on English


4.Which subject do you need to improve ?
- I need to improve Biology/ Physics
5.What do you do to improve your English
- I do grammar exercises


read English stories



Ex: I often do my homework after dinner
My mother usually helps me with my
homework. I often spend an hour on
English, half an hour on History…I need
to improve Math (etc)


<b>II. Listen to the dialogue and complete </b>
<b>the report card:</b>


*New words


<b>-</b> day present (n)
<b>-</b> attendance (n)


<b>-</b> behavior-participation (n)
<b>-</b> making-period (n)


<b>-</b> comment (n)


<b>-</b> fail (a)
<b>-</b> encourage (v)


<b>-</b> satisfactory (a)
<b>-</b> signature (n)


<b>-</b> co-operation (n)
Keys :


1, 87 days present


2, 5 days absent
3, Participation : S
4, Listening : C
5, Speaking : A
6, Reading : A
7, Writing : B


<b>-</b> write about your studyinghabits
<b>-</b> guides Ss how to do exercises 1, 2


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

<b>Date of teaching: /11/2011 </b>


<b>Unit 5 :Study habits</b>



<b>Period 29</b> <i>Lesson 3. Read</i>


I, <b>Objectives :</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can understand the content of the text about
learning new words .


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocab : Piece of paper, list, mother tongue, learn by heart, in order to, revise
stick, come across, underline, highlight


- Grammar : Review simple present
- Skills : reading, writing



III, <b>Teaching aids</b> : Book, chalk...
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1, <b>Warm up</b> :<b> </b>


<b>-</b> <b>Net words</b>


2, <b>Pre-reading</b>


- Shows the pictures and asks Ss some
questions:


+ How many English words do you try to
learn everyday ?


+ How do you learn new words ?


- gives new words ( When Ss answer )
- Practice new words


- rubs out and remember
3, <b>While </b>–<b> reading</b>



- T asks Ss to read the text in silence (2')
- T asks some yes / no questions


+ Do all learners write the meaning of the
newwords in their mother tongue ?


<b>Net words</b>


<b>Ways of learning new words</b>


“ ”


<i><b>I, New words : </b></i>
- piece of paper (n)
- list (n)


- mother tongue (n)
- learn by heart (v)
- in order to = so as to:
- stick (v) = label
- come across (v):
- underline (v)
- highlight (v)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

+ Do some learners make sentences with
newwords ? (etc)


- Guides Ss how to do exercise 1



- Ss work in pairs (2’)Then give the answers
- Corrects mistakes


-


4, <b>Post- reading</b>


- Ss retell the ways to learn newwords
5, <b>Homework:</b>


II,<b>Tick " T "or "F "</b>


a, F c, F
b, T d, T


<b>-</b> learn by heart newwords
<b>-</b> write the ways to learn


newwords;


<b>Date of teaching: /11/2011 </b>


<b>Unit 5 :Study habits</b>



<b>Period 30</b> <i>Lesson 4. Read(cont)</i>


I, <b>Objectives :</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can understand the content of the text about


learning new words .


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

- Grammar : Review simple present
- Skills : reading, writing


III, <b>Teaching aids</b> : Book, chalk...
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1, <b>Warm up</b> :<b> </b>


<b>-</b> <b>slap the board</b>


3, <b>While - reading</b>


- T asks Ss to read the text in silence (2')
again


- Corrects mistakes


- Asks Ss read all questions and the text


again to find the answers


- Work in pairs (2')


- One asks and one answers
- Some others repeat.


- Some write down on the board
- corrects mistakes


4, <b>Post- reading</b>


- Ss retell the ways to learn new words
- Ss work in group and discuss


- T gives remark


5, <b>Homework:</b>


<b>Slap the board</b>
<b>mother tough,learn by</b>




<b>heart,revise,underline,stick,…”</b>


III, <b>Answer the questions</b>


a, No.Learners learn words in the
different ways



b, Because they want to remember how
to use the words in the right way


c, They write each word and its use on
a small piece of paper and stick it
somewhere so as to learn it at any time
d, Because they want to learn only
important words


e, Revision is necessary in learning
words


f, I should try different ways of
learning words and find out the best
way for myself


<b>-</b> underline the new words
<b>-</b> highlight the new words
<b>-</b> put the meaning of the new


words in their mother tough and
learn them by heart


<b>-</b> …..


<b>-</b> learn by heart newwords
<b>-</b> write the ways to learn


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

<b>Date of teaching: / /2011 </b>



<b>Unit 5 :Study habits</b>



<b>Period 31</b> <i>Lesson 4.Write </i>


I, <b>Objectives </b>:


By the end of the lesson, Ss can know about the body of the letter and write
a letter using the information given


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


<b>-</b> Vocab: body, heading, closing, lunar new year, opening, regards, enjoyable.
- Grammar: Review simple tenses


- Skill: writing
III, <b>Teaching aids</b> :


Book, chalk, extra board
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>



1, <b>Warm up</b> :
- Write new words.


- Write the ways to learn new words
2, <b>Pre - writing</b> :


T asks some questions:


+ Do you often write to some one ?


1, <b>Look at Hoa's letter to Tim. Label </b>
<b>them with correct letter</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

+ Who do you often write letters to ?
+ How many sections are there in each
letter ? What are they ?


- Ss give the structure of a letter
- T asks Ss to read the letter given (2')
- Label each section in the letter.
- corrects mistakes


3, <b>While - writing</b>


- Asks Ss to read the information in the box
and compare with the letter in Ex1


- Guides Ss to write sentences using the
words given



- Ss write in 5’


4, <b>Post writing </b>


- Have some Ss write their letters on the
board


- Corrects mistakes
5<b>, Homework</b>:<b> </b>


- Heading : Writer 's address and the
date


- Opening : Dear...
- Body of the letter.


- Closing : Your friend / Regards /
love...


* Key: B D A C


2, <b>Now help Lan write a letter to her </b>
<b>penpal Donna in San Francisco</b>


Ex: ...Street
……, November…


Dear Donna,



Thanks for your letter. I'm glad to hear
you had a nice Mother's day. I received
my second semester report last month. I
got good grades for Geography, Physics
and Math but my English and History
results were poor. My teacher told me
to improve English and History. I must
study harder next school year.


In a few weeks we’re going to celebrate
the Mid - Autumn Festival. That's a
moon Festival in the Fall in Viet Nam.
I'm going to Ha Long Bay with my aunt
and uncle by bus this afternoon. I'll
send you a postcard from there.
Write soon and tell me all your news
Love ,


Lan.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

<b>Date of teaching: / /2011</b>


<b>Unit 5 : Study habits</b>



<b>Period 32</b> <i>Lesson 5. Language focus</i>
I, <b>Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson Ss can use commands, requests and advice in reported
speech; modals and adverbs of manner



<b>II./. Language content:</b>


<b>-</b> Vocab : behave, sore throat, replant, mend,
<b>-</b> Structure: To ask / tell sb to do sth


III, <b>Teaching aids</b> :


- Picture, book, chalk….
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1, <b>Warm up</b> :


<b>-</b> T repeats how to use the adverbs of
manner and explains how to do
exercise


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to fill in the blank (2’)
<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes


- Some Ss read the dialogue again


<b>2, Practice</b>



- Translate this title


- Explains the advice in reported speech
- Gives example


- Compare with commands and requests in
reported speech


- Ss work in pairs (2')


- Some Ss write on the board
- Corrects mistakes


3,<b>Production</b>:<b> </b>


<b>-</b> Reminds how to change into
reported speech


1, Complete the dialogue. Use the
adverbs of manner


b, hard d, badly
c, fast e, softly
3, Work with a partner


Ex:"Can you give Tim this dictionary?”
 Miss Jackson asked me to give you
this dictionary



Indirect: S + ask/ tell + O + to-V …
a, Miss Jackson told me to wait for her
outside her office


b, ... to give you your...


c, ...to help you with your...
d, ….. to meet her next week.


4, Work with a partner. Report Miss
Jackson’s advice


Eg : " Tim should work harder on his
Spanish pronunciation


 Miss Jackson said you should work
harder on your Spanish pronunciation


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

4,<b>Home work</b> :


c,…………. listen to Spanish …..
d, ………… practice reading ……


- review how to change into reported
speech


- guides Ss to do exercise 7 (p36-WB)
- Prepare Unit 6


<b>Date of teaching: / /2011</b>



Period 33: Unit 6 : THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB
<i>Lesson 1. Getting started + listen and read</i>


I, <b>Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can understand the dialogue and complete Nga,<sub>s details</sub>


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


*Vocabularies: enroll, application, hobby, acting,Young pioneer, handicapped.
*Grammar: Gerunds.


*Skills: Listening, reading.
III, <b>Teaching aids</b>:<b> </b>


Book, tape, cassette….
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


1,<b>Warm up</b>


T introduces about Getting started and
guides how to check in the box


- Asks Ss to find newwords


- Practice the newwords
- some Ss give the answers
- T checks and corrects


- Asks Ss to give some more actions
2, <b>Presentation</b>


T introdures the content of the dialogue
<b>-</b> Ss find newwords


<b>-</b> Guides Ss to read newwords
- repeats the structure


3,<b>Practice </b>


<b>-</b> listen to the tape (twice)
<b>-</b> Ss read after the tape
<b>-</b> Ss work in pairs (2’)


<b>-</b> Calls some pairs to read again
<b>-</b> T asks some questions:


+ What’s her full name ?
+ Where does Nga live ?


+ Does she have a telephone number ?
+ What’s her date of birth ?


+ What are her hobbies ?



<b>-</b> guides Ss how to complete Nga’s
details


<b>-</b> work in pairs (2’)


<b>-</b> Some Ss to write the results on the
board


<b>-</b> corrects mistakes


4,<b>Production</b>


Ss look at the extra board and say about
Nga


5,<b>Homework</b>


I,<b>Getting started</b>


<b>-</b> organization (n)
<b>-</b> blind (adj )


<b>-</b> handdicapped children (n)
<b>-</b> elderly (adj )


<b>-</b> clean up (v)


<b>-</b> care for (v) = look after
+ cleaning up streets
+ collecting waste paper


+ planting trees (etc)


II, <b>Listen and read</b>


<b>-</b> enrol (v)
<b>-</b> fill (v)


<b>-</b> application form (n)
<b>-</b> hobby (n)


* Like/ enjoy + Ving
1,<b>Practice the dialogue</b>


2,<b>Complete Nga s detail</b>’
Name: PHAM MAI NGA


Home address: 5 Tran Phu Street
Phone number: NO


Date of birth: April 22 ,1989
Sex: femail


Interests: drawing, outdoor activities
and acting


Ex: Her name is Pham Mai Nga. She
lives at 5 Tran Phu street. She was born
on April 22nd<sub> , 1989. Her hobbies are </sub>


drawing …



- learn by heart newwords


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

- prepare Speaking + language focus 3.


<b>Date of teaching: / /2011</b>


<b>Period 34: </b>

<b>Unit 6 : THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB</b>



<i>Lesson 2. Speak + Language focus 3</i>
I, <b>Objectives</b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss can ask for favors, offer assistance and respond
<b>II./. Language content:</b>


*Vocabularies :ask for favors, offer assistance, respond , do sb a favor
*Grammar: Modal verbs : Can, could.


*Skills: Speaking
III, <b>Teaching aids</b>:<b> </b>


Book, extra board,….
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>



<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1,<b>Warm up</b>


- Write new words


- tell something about Mai


<b>2, Pre-speaking</b>


- T introdures about the content of the
lesson


<b>I/ Speak:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

<b>-</b> Ss find newwords


<b>-</b> Guides Ss to read newwords


- T explains how to use the words
or phrases when you ask for favors or
offer assistance and respond


- Asks Ss to read the dialogue
- some pairs read before class


3,<b>While- speaking</b>


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to read the dialogue
again in pairs



<b>-</b> T guides Ss how to replace and
make new dialogues


<b>-</b> Work in pairs (3’)


<b>-</b> Some pairs practice asking and
answering before class


<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes


4,<b>Post-speaking</b>


<b>-</b> Repeats how to use Modals


<b>-</b> Guides Ss how to complete
<b>-</b> Work in pairs (2’)


<b>-</b> Some pairs of Ss read the dialogue
before class


<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes


partner


<b>-</b> Ask for favors (v)


<b>-</b> Do sb a favor (v)= help sb
<b>-</b> Respond = answer (v)
<b>-</b> Assist (v) = help


<b>-</b> Offer assistance (v)
* Asking for favors


<b>-</b> Can/ could you help me, please ?
carry this bag for me ?
<b>-</b> Could you do me a favor ?


<b>-</b> I need a favor
+ Responses:


- Certainly/ Of course/ Sure
- No problem


- What can I do for you ?
- How can I help you ?
- I’m sorry. I’m really busy
* Offering assistance
<b>-</b> May I help you ?


<b>-</b> Do you need any help ?
<b>-</b> Let me help you.


+ Responses:


- Yes. Thank you/ That’s very nice of
you


- No. Thank you


* Now make similar dialogues using the


phrases in the box.


Ex1:


Mrs Ngoc: Could you help me , please?
Hoa: Of course. How can I help you?
Mrs Ngoc: Can you help me tidy the
yard? I have a broken leg
Hoa: No problem. I’ll help you.


Mrs Ngoc: Thank you very much.That’s
very kind of you.


Ex2:


Receptionist: Do you need any help?
Tourist: Yes. Can you show me the
way to the police station? I’ve lost
money


Recept: Sure. Turn left at the first
corner. Go straight ahead. It’s on your
left.


<b>II/ Language- focus:</b>


*, <b>Modals: may, can, could</b>


Use: to ask for favor or offer assistance
* Ask for favor: Can/ Could you + V



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

- guides Ss to do similar a)


5,<b>Homework</b>


* Offer assistance: May/ Can I + V …?
3, Work with a partner.


a, Use the expression in the box to ask
for a favor. Then practice…


A, buy a ticket


B, take me across the road


C, help me with this math problem
D, water the flowers in the garden
b, Use useful expression… to complete
the dialogues. Then practice…


A1: Can I….


A2:: Do you need…….?


B3: ….me help you


- learn by heart newwords
- make 2 dialogues


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

<b> Date of teaching: / /2011 </b>



<b>Period 35:</b> Unit 6 : THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB


<i>Lesson 3 . LISTEN + Language focus 1,2</i>


<b>I, Objectives</b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen to the tape and catch the missing
words in the song.


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


*Vocabularies : unite, shout, hold hands,...
*Grammar: Review Modals


*Skills: Listening
III, <b>Teaching aids</b>:<b> </b>


Book, tape, cassette….
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1,<b>Warm up</b>



- 2 Ss make a dialogue ( ask for favors
and respond )


<b>2,Pre-listening</b>.<b> </b>


- T introduces about the content of the
song and guides Ss how to fill in the
blank


- Ss read and guess the missing words
- gives some newwords and practice the
newwords.


3,<b>While- listening</b>


<b>-</b> Listen to the tape ( twice )


<b>-</b> Listen and fill sentence by sentence
<b>-</b> Listen again to check the answers.
<b>-</b> Asks Ss to give the answers


<b> </b>


<b>4, Post </b>–<b>listening</b>


<b>-</b> explains the use of the present
tense with future meaning


<b>-</b> explains the differences between


the present with the future


meaning and the future tense


<b>I. Listening</b>


<i>1. New words:</i>
<b>-</b> north (n)
<b>-</b> south (n)
<b>-</b> unite (v)
<b>-</b> peace (n)


<i>2. Fill in the missing words</i>
Children of our land <b>unite</b>


Let’s sing for <b>peace</b>


Let’s sing for <b>right</b>


Let’s sing for the <b>love</b> between <b>north</b>


and <b>south</b>


Oh, children <b>of</b> our land, unite
Chilren of the <b>world </b>hold hands


Let’s <b>show</b> our love from place to place
Let’s shout <b>out</b> loud


Let’s make a <b>stand</b>



Oh, chilren of the <b>world</b>, hold hands.


<b>II/ Language focus 1,2</b>


1> <b>Present tense with future meaning</b>


*Use: to express a scheduled future
event


Ex: When do you have Math?


* Note: to express a future personal plan
or arrangement or an intention or a
prediction


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

<b>Practice</b>


- T shows the extra board with Y&Y
plan.


<b>-</b> Guides Ss how to do exercise
<b>-</b> Asks Ss to give questions for each


colunm and the others answer.
<b>-</b> Asks Ss to work in pairs (2’)
<b>-</b> Calls some pairs to practice before


class



<b>-</b> Some Ss write down on the board
<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes


<b>-</b> Explains how to use gerunds
<b>-</b> Gives some examples


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to look at the table and
tell about Ba and Lan’s hobbies
<b>-</b> Repeats the structure with but,


and, …either, too.
<b>-</b> Ss work in pairs


<b>-</b> Some Ss read the sentences and
some write on the board


<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes
- Guides Ss how to do


<b>-</b> Work in pairs (2’)


<b>-</b> Some pairs of Ss ask and answer
about themselves


5, <b>Homework</b>


Ex1: Work with the partner. Ask and
answer questions about Y&Y.


Ex:a, When do they collect and empty


garbage ?


<b>-</b> On January 9


b, Where do they collect and empty
garbage ?


- At Dong Xuan Market


c,What time do they start and finish
work?


<b>-</b> They start at 8a.m and finish at 5p.m
2> <b>Gerunds</b>


- We use gerunds after prepositions and
after some verbs such as: enjoy, like,
love, hate, dislike …


Ex2: Work with a partner


a, Talk about our friends’ hobbies
Ex:


+ Ba loves playing soccer, but he
doesn’t like washing up


+ Lan doesn’t like washing up and she
doesn’t like playing soccer, either.
+ Ba hates cooking meals, but he likes


performing music


+ Lan likes cooking meals, and she likes
performing music, too.(etc)


b, Copy the table. Then complete about
you.Next ask and answer questions.
Ex:Do you like playing soccer?
<b>-</b> Yes. I like playing soccer
<b>-</b> No. I hate it. What about you ?
- Do exercises 2( page 39- SBT )
- prepare for Reading


<b>Date of teaching: / /2011 </b>


<b>Period 36</b>

<b>: Unit 6 : THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB</b>



<i>Lesson 4 . </i><b>Read</b>
I, <b>Objectives</b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss can read and understand the content of the text
about the Scouts Association


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


*Vocabularies : encourage, citizenship, fitness, aim, build, Association, Atlantic,
coeducation, differ, slightly, establish.


*Grammar: Review Modals
*Skills: Reading



III, <b>Teaching aids</b>:<b> </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1, <b> Warm up</b>


- Write newwords
- Summarize the text .


<b>2, Pre-reading</b>


<b>-</b> Introduces the content of the text
<b>-</b> Asks Ss to guess what the Boy


Scouts and Girl Guides do
<b>-</b> Explains some newwords
- Guides Ss to read newwords


<b>3,While- reading</b>


<b>-</b> Guides Ss to read the text (once)


- Ss read in silence (3’) and find out
the missing dates.


<b>-</b> One St writes on the board.
Corrects mistakes and explain why
Ss read the text again in silence (2’)
Work in pairs to find the answers
<b>-</b> Some pairs of Ss ask and answer
<b>-</b> Some Ss write on the board
<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes.


4, <b>Post - reading</b>


-Asks Ss to retell something about the
BSA


5, <b>Homework</b>


I/ Newwords:


<b>-</b> encourage (v)
<b>-</b> build (v)
<b>-</b> citizenship (n)
<b>-</b> fitness (n)


<b>-</b> Scouts Association (n)
<b>-</b> coeducation (n)


<b>-</b> differ (v)
<b>-</b> slightly (adv)


<b>-</b> establish (v)
<b>-</b> aim (v)


II/ <b>Fill in the missing dates:</b>


a, 1907
b, 1909
c, 1910
d, 1994


III/ <b>Answer</b>:<b> </b>


a, Scouting began in England in 1907
b, The meeting between a boy and Mr
WilliamBoyce led … in 1910.


c, Girls can join in the Girl Guides
Association and Camp Fire Boys and
Girls.


d,The three aims are building character ,
good citizenship and personal fitness.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

<b>Date of teaching: / /2011 </b>


<b>Period 37 : </b>

<b>Unit 6 : THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB</b>



<i>Lesson 5 . </i><b>WRITE</b>


I, <b>Objectives</b>



By the end of the lesson, Ss can write a letter to Hoa’s parents from the
conversation between Hoa and her aunt.


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


* Vocabularies: community, recycle, save, nature resource, raise fund,
sidewalk, register.


* Grammar: Review simple future.
* Skill: writing.


III, <b>Teaching aids</b>:<b> </b>


Book, extra board<b>…</b>.


<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1, <b> Warm up</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

-Brainstorming:



2,<b> Pre-writing</b>


<b>-</b> Introduces the lesson
<b>-</b> Asks Ss to read the notice
<b>-</b> Ss find newwords


<b>-</b> Guides Ss to read newwords
- Guides Ss how to do exercise


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to read the notice again
and find the appropriate words to
fill in the blank


<b>-</b> Work in pairs (2’)


<b>-</b> Some Ss come to the board and
complete the letter


<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes.
3, <b>While-writing</b>


<b>-</b> T guides Ss to read the dialogue
<b>-</b> Ss read the dialogue in silence


(2’)


<b>-</b> T asks some questions about the
content of the dialogue:


(?) What’s Hoa going to join ?


(?) What’s she going to do ?
(?) Is she going to plant trees and
flowers in the school garden ?
(?) Are they selling trees to some
schools ?


<b>-</b> Guides Ss how to write
<b>-</b> Work in pairs (5’)


<b>-</b> Some Ss write on the board


4, <b>Post-writing</b>


<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to retell the content of
the letter


<b>-</b> T reminds how to write a letter
5, <b> Homework</b>


<i><b>I, New words: </b></i>


- community (n)
<b>-</b> recycle (v)
<b>-</b> save (v)


<b>-</b> nature resource (n)
<b>-</b> raise fund (v)
<b>-</b> sidewalk (n)


<b>-</b> register (v)


II. <b>Read the passage and complete the </b>
<b>letter</b>:


1, community 6, save
2, recycling 7, earn


3, collect 8, participating
4, send 9, planting
5, recycling 10, helping


III, <b>Read the dialogue.. Then write a </b>
<b>letter to Hoa s parents.</b>’


Dear Mom and Dad ,


I’m glad to tell you that I’m going to join
the Y&Y Green Group of my school.
The Y&Y is holding an environment
month. We’re going to clean the banks of
the lakes on weekends. We’re going to
plant trees and flowers in the school
garden and water them every afternoon
after class. We’re going to plant young
trees and plants to sell to some schools.
We hope we can give more green color to
the city and earn some money for our
school Y&Y.



Write to me soon and tell me about you.
Love,


Your daughter,
Hoa


<b>-</b> Write a letter to your friend about
your plan in the future.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

<i> Date of teaching: / /2011 </i>
<i><b>Period 38 : </b></i>

<b>revision</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Help Ss to review structures & practice exercises in Unit 4,5,6.
Have enough knowledge to do written test No.2.


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


+ Gram: Past simple, Prepositions of time, Reported speech, Used to,
Modals, Gerund,


+ Skill: speaking, reading, writing
<b>II. Teaching aids: </b>


Textbook , lesson plan.
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings



- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


<i><b>1. Theory:</b></i>


- Ask Ss to retell some main
knowledges which have learnt in
Unit 4,5,6.


+ The form of verb in past simple.


I/ Grammar:
-Past simple,


-Prepositions of time,
-Reported speech,
-Used to,


-Modals,
-Gerund,

1. Past simple:
+ Form:


S + Ved + O


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

- Retell structure of "used to"


- Make example.


- Repeat: asking for favors &
offering assistance, responding.


- Ss repeat : in, on, at, before,
after.


- Ss repeat structure & make
examples.


<i><b>2. Practice:</b></i>


- Guide Ss to do exercises
1. walking


2. listen
3. reads
4. left


2. Used to:
+ Form:


S + used to /didn't use to / usedn't to+ V.in
Ex: I used to walk to school.


didn't use to
<i> usedn't to</i>


3/ Modal verbs: may, can, could.


*Asking for favors:


- Can/Could you...?


Sure/ Of course/ Certainly/ ....
*Offering assistance:


- May I help you?
Yes, thank you


No, thank you. I'm fine.
4. Prepositions of time.
+ in: year/ month
+ on: date/ day
+ at: o'clock


+ before/ after: time.
5. Gerund.


- After some verbs: like, love, enjoy, hate,
...+ V.ing


- After prepositions + V.ing
- In progressives tense.
6. Reported speech:


* Affirmative commands (mệnh lệnh xác định)
V + O/A


- S + told/ ordered/ ... + O + to + V.in + O/A


ex: "Clean the board". Hoan said to Bao.
Hoan told Bao to clean the board.


* Negative commands: (mệnh lệnh phủ định)
Don't + V + O/A
-S + told/ ordered/ ... + O + not to +V.in<i><b> </b><b> + O/A</b></i>
Requests: (câu yêu cầu)


S + asked/ begged/ ... + O + to + V.in<i><b> </b><b> + O/A</b></i>
ex: Please turn on<i> the light.</i>


Turn on<i> the light, please.</i>
He asked me to turn on the light.


*Exercise 1: Put the verbs in the correct form
1. He likes (walk) to school.


2. She used to ( listen) to music.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

a. My mother advised me to get
up early.


b. She asked me to open the door.
c. The man told her to take him
that book.


d. The teacher advised us to
practice reading English.


a. What does she look like ?


b. What does she like ?
- Call Ss write on board.
- Remark & check.
<i><b>3. Home work:</b></i>


a. "You should get up earlier".


- My mother advised me ...
b. "Open the door".


- She asked me ...
c. "Take me that book, please."


- The man told her ...
d. " You should practice reading English"
- The teacher advised us ...
*Exercise 3: Make questions for answers
a/ She is tall & slim


...
b/ He is generous & kind.


...
*Exercise 4:


Describe your class. (about 5 sentences)


- Ask Ss to learn newwords, grammar in unit
4,5,6.



- Write 8 sentences about: your friend/ your
house/ your chores.


- Prepare for Written test . No.2


====================================================
<b>Date of teaching: / /2011 </b>


<b>Period 39:</b> test 45 minutes<b> </b>


I, <b>Objectives</b>:


<b>-</b> Check the following knowledge:


+ The past simple and present simple tenses
+ Forms of verbs+ Reported speech


+ Prepositions of time
+ Reading comprehension
II. <b>Contents</b>:


I.Pick out the word that have differeent sound from the rest :


1 A. Rev<b>i</b>se B. w<b>i</b>fe C. k<b>i</b>nd D. v<b>i</b>sit


2 A. Heart B. teach C. meaning D. really


3 A. Proud B. sound C. your D. scouting


4 A. Summer B. lunar C. lunch D. but



5 A. Habit B. name C. safe D. tale


II. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences bellow:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

A. On B
.


in C. at D. of


7 Lan and Ba enjoy ...speaking English very much.


A. Practice B


.


practicing C. to practice D. practiced
8 My mother used to ...long hair.


A. Having B


.


had C. has D. have


9 The teacher asked us ...our English and Math results.


A. Improving B


.



improved C. to improve D. improve


10 Could you ...me a favor, please? No problem. I’ll help you.


A. Help B


.


do C. make D. tell


11 That’s very kind ...you to help me.


A. Of B


.


in C. on D. about


12 He said we should ...the roof of our house.


A. To repair B


.


Repairing C. repair D. repaired


13 I ...to the movies with my friends last weekend.


A. Go B



.


are going C. will go D. went


14 Nga can speak English very ...


A. Good B


.


goodly C. well D. bad


15 She told me ...all the new words by heart.


A. not learn B


.


not to learn C. to not learn D. not to learned
16. We always start our new school year...September


A. at B. in C. on D. by


17. It’s excellent. You did very...


A. good B. well C. bad D. badly


18. Could you ... me a favor, please? - Yes. Of course



A. do B. make C. work D.does
19. His doctor advised him...up late.


A. stay B.not stay C.not to stay D.to not stay
20. After each English lesson, you ought to learn new words...


A. oral B. by head C. in heart D. by heart


21. Folktales are... stories.


A. traditional B. modern C. new D. fact


22. I sometimes have to look…...my younger brother when my parents are away from
home.


A. at B. in C. after D. for


23. I ...get up late last year but now I don’t.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

24. Please, stop... I’m trying to finish a letter to Y&Y Green Group


A. talk B. talked C. talks D. talking
25. Scouting………..in England in 1907


A. began B. begin C. begined D. begins
<b>III/Read the passage carefully then write (T) or (F) for the sentences below :</b>
Dear Mary ,


Thanks a lot for your gift . I’m very happy to hear that you had a nice holiday in Italy.
I’ve finished the school year, but I’m not very satisfied with my results . I got good


grades for all the subjects except for English . My English teacher said I wasn’t good at
it, especially speaking and writing . Although I’ve tried my best. I can’t improve my
English . Can you show me how to study it well ? I’ll be very grateful if you can drop me
a few lines about it . If only you were here , then I can learn something from you .


Write to me soon and tell all your news .By the way , send my best regards to your
parents


Regards ,
Lan Mai


<b>True or False? Write T/F before each sentence :</b>


... 26. Mai received a gift from Mary.
... 27. Mary had an enjoyable holiday in Italy .


... 28. Mai is very pleased with the results of her studying .


... 29. She wasn’t good at English , but she could speak and write it very well
... 30. She asked Mary to show her how to improve her English


<b>IV/ Change the following sentences into reported speech::</b>
31. “Please give me the book, Lan”. said Hoa .


=> Hoa asked ___________________________________________________________
32. Their mother said to them: " Don't make so much noise."


=> Their mother asked them ________________________________________________
33. “You should practice speaking English every day”, the teacher said.



=> The teacher said we ____________________________________________________
34. “Could you help me ?” Mrs Jackson said to Mary .


=> Mrs Jackson __________________________________________________________
35. " Don't throw things away," Miss Linda said to the students.


=> Miss Linda told the students ______________________________________________
36. He said to me: " Don't forget to post the letter."


=> He told me ___________________________________________________________
37. " Can you open your bag, please?" the customs officers said.


=> The customs officers asked me ___________________________________________
38. My mother said to me: “ Try your best next semester”.


=> My mother asked ______________________________________________________
39. The policeman said to Mr.Lam: “Move your car away”


=> The policeman told ____________________________________________________
40. “Don’t talk in class,please”, The teacher said to us


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

<b>Date of teaching: / /2011 </b>


<b>Period 40</b>

<b>Unit 7 : </b>

<b>MY NEIGHBORHOOD</b>


<i>Lesson 1 . Getting started + listen and read</i>
I, <b>Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can read and understand the dialogue.Then complete
the sentences



<b>II./. Language content:</b>


* Vocabularies: since, for, close by, serve, pancake, wet market.
*Grammar: the present perfect tense


*Skills: Listening, reading.


<b>III. Teaching aids: </b>


Book, tape, cassette, picture<b>…</b>.
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>
<b>1. Warm up</b>


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to read the words in the box
and name each picture


<b>-</b> Some Ss give the answers


<b>-</b> Then T asks Ss some questions :
+ What’s this ?


+ Is there one near your house?


<b>-</b> Ss work in pairs


<b>-</b> Some pairs Ss ask and answer
2, <b>Presentation</b>


<b>-</b> T introduces the content of the
dialogue


<b>-</b> Plays the tape, Ss listen and find


I, <b>Getting started</b>


* Match the names of places
a, grocery store (n)


b, stadium (n)
c, wet market (n)
d, drug store (n)
e, hairdresser’s(n)
f, swimming pool(n)
II, <b>Listen and read</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

newwords


<b>-</b> Guides Ss to read newwords


- Introduces about the use and the form of
the pressent perfect tense


-guides Ss to make some sentenses



3,<b>Practice</b>


<b>-</b> plays the tape (twice)
<b>-</b> Ss listen and repeat
<b>-</b> Ss work in pairs (2’)


<b>-</b> Calls some pairs to read again
<b>-</b> T asks some questions:


+ Is Na new to the neighborhood?
+ How long has she been there?
+ How is her mother?


+ What does the restaurant serve?


- T guides Ss to complete the sentences
- Ss work in pairs (2’)


- Ss give the result
-T corrects mistakes


4,<b>Production</b>


- Asks Ss to correct mistakes in these
sentences


5,<b>Homework</b>


<b>-</b> Close by (adv) = Nearby


<b>-</b> Serve (v)


<b>-</b> Pancake (n)
* Structure:


Ex:We have been here since last week
Na has been here for about 10 days


<b>- S + have/ has + Ved/3 + O…</b>
<b>-</b> be --- were/ was --- been
<b>-</b> go --- went --- gone
<b>-</b> do --- did --- done
1,<b>Practice the dialogue</b>


2,<b>Complete the sentences .Use the </b>
<b>words from the dialogue. </b>


a, new
b, last week
c, tired
d, restaurant
e, Hue
f, pancakes.


*Exercise: Corrects mistakes


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

<b>Date of teaching: / /2011 </b>


<b>Period 41 : </b>

<b>Unit 7 : </b>

<b>MY NEIGHBORHOOD</b>


<i>Lesson 2. </i><b>SPEAK + listen</b>


I, <b>Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can speak how to send a letter or a parcel and listen to
the conversation, then fill in the blanks and answer T or F or No information


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


*<b>Vocabularies</b>: parcel, surface mail, millenium, star movie channel, contest,
newcomer, kick off, photographer.


*<b>Grammar</b>: How much + be + S?


- Review the simple present and simple future
*<b>Skill</b>: Speaking, Listening.


<b>III. Teaching aids</b>:<b> </b>


Book, extra board,….
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>
<b>1. Warm up:</b>



*Check the old lesson


<b>2. Speaking</b>
<b>Pre-speaking</b>


- T introduces the situation of the
dialogue


<b>-</b> Ss find newwords


<b>-</b> Guides Ss to read newwords
<b>-</b> Guides Ss to read the dialogue in


chorus


<b>-</b> Some pairs of Ss read again
<b>-</b> Guides Ss how to make similar


dialogues with the brochure and
the information.


<b>While- speaking</b>


- Asks Ss to work in pairs (2’)


- some pairs of Ss practice before class


- Write newwords


- write the structure and make sentences


with the present perfect.


<b>I. Speaking</b>


1. Practice the dialogue with a partner
<b>-</b> Parcel (n) = packet


<b>-</b> Surface mail (n)
<b>-</b> Item (n)


<b>-</b> Charge (n)


<b>-</b> Brochure (n) : tËp quảng cáo nhỏ


2. Look at the following brochure and the
information in the box. Make similar
dialogue


<b>Ex1:</b>


A: I want to send this letter to Kon Tum
B: Do you want to send it airmail or
surface mail ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

- T corrects mistakes


<b>Post-speaking</b>


<b>-</b> Some pairs of excellent Ss say
again without looking at the


book.


(T gives another examples)


<b>3. Listening</b>
<b>Pre listening.</b>


- T introduces the content of the
dialogue


- T explains some newwords
<b>-</b> Practice the newwords


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to read “ What’s on this
weekend” and guess how to
complete.


<b>While- listening</b>


<b>-</b> Plays the tape (3- 4 times)
<b>-</b> Ss listen and fill in the blanks
<b>-</b> Compare with the partner
<b>-</b> Asks Ss to give the answers
<b>-</b> Listen again and check.


- Explains the demand of the exercise
<b>-</b> guides Ss how to check


<b>-</b> Ss read information and guess
<b>-</b> Plays the tape again 3 times


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to give the result
<b>-</b> Listen again to check


<b>Post </b>–<b>listening</b>


- Asks some questions:


+ Does Na know the neighborhood well?
+ Is there a new film at the Millenium
cinema?


+ Will Na go to the English speaking
contest ?


+ What time does the match start?
4,<b>Homework</b>


B: Twenty grams. That’ll be 800 dong.
A: All right. Here you are


<b>Ex2</b>:


A: I want to send this parcel to Ca Mau?
B: Do you want to send it airmail or
surface mail?


A: I want to send it airmail. How much is
it?


B: I’ll have to weigh the parcel first. Two


kilograms. That’ll be 13,000 dong.


A: All right. Here you are


+ letter/ Ha Noi/ surface mail/ 800 dong.
+ parcel/ Hue/ airmail/ 3kg/ 20.000 dong


<b>II. Listening </b>


1.Listen to the conversation. Then fill in
the blanks…


<b>-</b> contest (n)
<b>-</b> Newcomer (n)


<b>-</b> Millenium (n) thiªn niªn kû
<b>-</b> Kick off (v) = start


<b>-</b> Photographer (n)
<b>-</b> Star movie channel (n)
1, Newcomer


2, Townground


3, English Speaking Contest
4, Culture House


2. Listen again and check the correct box
for “T” “F” or No information



a, T
b, F
c, F
d, T
e, T


f, No information


<b>-</b> learn by heart newwords


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

<b>-</b> prepare for reading.


<b>Date of teaching: / /2011 </b>


<b> Period 42: </b>

<b>Unit 7 : </b>

<b>MY NEIGHBORHOOD</b>


<i>Lesson 3. </i><b>READ</b>


I, <b>Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can read and understand the content of the text about
the shopping mall


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


*<i><b>Vocabularies:</b></i> mall, humid, resident, concern, organize, roof, business, goods
*<i><b>Grammar</b></i>: Review present perfect tense


*<i><b>Skill</b></i>: reading comprehension


<b>III.Teaching aids</b>:<b> </b>



- Book, extra board,….
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>
<b>1. Warm up </b>


- T asks some questions:


+ Have you ever gone shopping?
+ Where did you go shopping?


+ Is there any shops or supermarkets
near your house ?


2, <b> Pre-speaking</b>


<b>-</b> T introduces the content of the
text


<b>-</b> T reads the text first, Ss listen and
find newwords


<b>-</b> Guides Ss to read newwords
- guides Ss to make sentences with
newwords



3,<b>While-reading</b>


<b>-</b> Guides Ss to read the text in
chorus


- Ss read in silence and check the boxes
in pairs (3’)


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to give the answers and
explain why to do so.


<b>-</b> T corrects mistakes


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to read the text again in
silence and find the answers in
pairs (3’)


<b>-</b> Some pairs of Ss ask and answer
<b>-</b> Some Ss write on the board
<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes.


4, <b>Post - reading</b>


<b>-</b> Discuss about the advantages and
disadvantages when the new
shopping mall opens


<b></b>


-5, <b>Homework</b>:



<b>CHATTING</b>


<b>1. New words:</b>


<b>-</b> shopping mall (n)
<b>-</b> humid (adj) = wet
<b>-</b> resident (n)


<b>-</b> concern (v) = worry
<b>-</b> organize (v)


<b>-</b> business (n)
<b>-</b> roof (n)
<b>-</b> goods (n)


<b>-</b> air-conditioned (a)
<b>-</b> discount (n)


2.<b>True or False?. Correct the false </b>
<b>sentences.</b>


a,F (seven days a week )


b,F (There are 50 stores in the mall)
c,F (some people are not pleased)
d,T


e,T



3. <b>Answer</b>:


a, All the shops are under one roof.
Customers will shop in comfort and
won’t notice the weather.


b,In the shopping mall, there are 50
air-conditioned specialty stores, 4 movie
theaters and 10 restaurants. There is also
a children’s play area.


c,They think the new shopping mall will
take their business.


d, The stores in the mall will offer a wider
selection of products, some kind of goods
are at cheaper prices.


4.Discussion:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

==================================================


<b>Date of teaching: /12/2011 </b>


<b>Period 43: Unit 7 : MY NEIGHBORHOOD</b>
<i>Lesson 4 . WRITE + LANGUAGE FOCUS 5</i>
I, <b>Objectives</b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a notice
<b>II./. Language content:</b>



*Vocabularies: effect, hardware store, contact.
*Grammar: Review simple future.


*Skill: writing.


<b>III. Teaching aids:</b>


- Book, extra board…
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1, <b> Warm up</b>


- Write newwords
2,<b> Pre-writing</b>


- T introduces about the notice
- Ss read and find newwords
- Guides Ss to read newwords


- Asks Ss some questions about the



1,Read the the community notice
<b>-</b> Effect (n) hËu qu¶


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

content of the notice


- Guides Ss how to write the notice
(there isn’t S in each sentence)


3, <b>While-writing</b>


<b>-</b> Ss read the passage (2’)and write
the notice on the notebook (T
emphasizes the nessessary
information in the notice)
<b>-</b> Work in pairs


<b>-</b> Calls Ss to read the answer
<b>-</b> One St writes on the board
<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to write a notice about
class meeting ( T guides Ss how to
write a passage and a notice)


<b>-</b> Ss work in pairs (5’)


<b>-</b> Calls some Ss to write on the
board


<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes



4, <b>Post-writing</b>


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to retell how to use
comparative


<b>-</b> T explains the equal comparison


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to find newwords and
practice the newwords


<b>-</b> T guides Ss how to do exercise
<b>-</b> Work in pairs (2’)


<b>-</b> Some Ss give the result


2, Use the similar format to write a notice
about the English speaking contest.


The school English speaking club.
Holding a speaking contest to celebrate
the Teacher’s day.


Date : November 15


Place : Hall 204, Building G
Time: 7.30 – 10 p.m


Please contact Tran Thi Thu Hang of
class 8H at the above address for


more information.


3, Write one or two notices about your
class meeting or sports club meeting
* Passage:


Our class is going to hold a meeting to
celebrate the Teacher’s day. It’ll be at our
classroom after class next Saturday. The
person to contact is Nguyen Tien Thanh
* Notice:


All members of class 8H


Meeting to prepare for the Teacher’s day.
Date: Saturday


Time: after class


Place: at our classroom


Please contact Nguyen Tien Thanh for
more information.


<b>4.Language focus 5:</b>


Look at the picture, complete the
sentenses, use the words in the box
* Equal comparison:



<b>-</b> <b>S1 + be(not) + as + adj + as + S2</b>
Ex: I am as tall as my sister


* <b>The same as >< different from</b>


Ex: Your pen is the same as my pen
Your pen is different from my pen


<b>-</b> backpack (n)
<b>-</b> snake (n)


<b>-</b> pocket watch (n)
<b>-</b> wrist watch (n)
c, not as cheap as
d, the same as
e, as expensive as
f, different from
g, as long as


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes


5, <b>Homework</b>


<b>-</b> Rewrite a notice about sports club
meeting


<b>-</b> Prepare for language focus


============================================
<b>Date of teaching: /12/2011 </b>



<b>Period 44:</b>

<b>Unit 7 : </b>

<b>MY NEIGHBORHOOD</b>


<i>Lesson 5 . LANGUAGE FOCUS</i>
I.Objective


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use present perfect tense
<b>II./. Language content:</b>


*Vocabularies: effect, hardware store, contact.
*Grammar: Review simple future.


*Skill: writing, reading


<b>III. Teaching aids:</b>


- Textbook, poster, cards
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>
<b>1. Warm- up</b>


<b> - Stick a poster of infinitives and Past </b>
Participles on the board.



- Divide the class into 2 teams


- Get Ss form 2 teams to go to the board
and write each pair of infinitive – past
participle


- Get Ss to repeat in chorus and


remember the past participles of irregular
verbs .


2. Presentation :


3. <b>Practice</b>


<b>-</b> T explains how to do the exercises


<b> </b>


<b>* Matching </b>
Answers :


+ be – been write – written
+ go – gone live – lived


+ see – seen collect – collected
+ do – done attend – attended
+ eat – eaten work – worked


I, <b>Present perfect tense</b>


<b>(+) S + have/ has + V3ed + O </b>


<b>(-)</b> <b>S + haven t/ hasn t + P.P + O</b>’ ’


<b>(?) Have/ has + S +P.P + O ?</b>


<b>For + length of time</b>
<b>Since + starting point</b>


2, Complete with since or for


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

- T repeats how to use “ since” and
“for”


<b>-</b> Ss work in pairs (2’)


<b>-</b> Some Ss write the result on the
board


<b>-</b> T corrects mistakes


<b>-</b> Guides Ss how to do this exercise
- gives an example


- asks Ss to work in pairs (2’)
<b>-</b> some Ss write on the board
corrects mistakes


- Translates the title



<b>-</b> Guides Ss how to complete (note:
adv of time and tense )


<b>-</b> Work in pairs (2’)


<b>-</b> Some Ss write the result on the
board


<b>-</b> T corrects mistakes


<b>-</b> T guides Ss how to do exercise
<b>-</b> Work in pairs (2’)


<b>-</b> Some Ss give the result
<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes
<b>4. Consolidation:</b>


5. Homework:


for five minutes for three hours
since January for 10 weeks
since 1990 since Friday
since the Summer for 20 years.
3,Complete the sentenses, using the
present perfect form of the verbs.
b, haven’t eaten


c, haven’t seen
d, have attended


e, has worked
f, has collected


4, Complete the conversation, use the
correct form of the verbs


1, have been 5, want
2, hope 6, looks


3, have…lived 7, have…been
4, is 8,have see


<i><b>* Exercise</b></i>: correct mistakes :


1, Nam has learned English for 2 o’clock
2, They has gone to Ha Noi


3, This book is different as that one


- redo all the exercises in the notebooks .
- Prepare the next lesson


:


<b>Date of teaching: / /2011 </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

<b> </b>


I.Objective



By the end of the lesson, help students understand clearly about the written test, show
the students’ mistakes and explain to them


II. Preparation


Answering and explaining
III.<b> Procedure:</b>


<b>0,25pts for each correct answer.</b>


I.Pick out the word that have differeent sound from the rest :


1 A. Rev<b>i</b>se B. w<b>i</b>fe C. K<b>i</b>nd D. v<b>i</b>sit


2 A. Heart B. teach C. Meaning D. really


3 A. Proud B. sound C. Your D. scouting


4 A. Summer B. lunar C. Lunch D. but


5 A. Habit B. name C. Safe D. tale


<b>1.D</b> <b>2.A</b> <b>3.C</b> <b>4.B</b> <b>5.A</b>


<b>II. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences bellow:</b>


6 We always celebrate Vietnamese Teachers’ Day ...November 20th every year.


A. On B



.


in C


.


At D. of


7 Lan and Ba enjoy ...speaking English very much.


A. Practice B


.


practicing C


.


to practice D. practiced
8 My mother used to ...long hair.


A. Having B


.


had C


.


Has D. have



9 The teacher asked us ...our English and Math results.


A. Improving B


.


improved C


.


to improve D. improve
10 Could you ...me a favor, please? No problem. I’ll help you.


A. Help B


.


do C


.


Make D. tell


11 That’s very kind ...you to help me.


A. Of B


.



in C


.


On D. about


12 He said we should ...the roof of our house.


A. To repair B


.


repairing C


.


Repair D. repaired


13 I ...to the movies with my friends last weekend.


A. Go B


.


are going C


.


will go D. went



14 Nga can speak English very ...


A. Good B


.


goodly C


.


Well D. bad


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

A. not learn B
.


not to learn C
.


to not learn D. not to learned
16. We always start our new school year...September


A. at B. in C. on D. by


17. It’s excellent. You did very...


A. good B. well C. bad D. badly


18. Could you ... me a favor, please? - Yes. Of course


A. do B. make C. work D.does


19. His doctor advised him...up late.


A. stay B.not stay C.not to stay D.to not stay
20. After each English lesson, you ought to learn new words...


A. oral B. by head C. in heart D. by heart


21. Folktales are... stories.


A. traditional B. modern C. new D. fact


22. I sometimes have to look…...my younger brother when my parents are away from
home.


A. at B. in C. after D. for


23. I ...get up late last year but now I don’t.


A. use to B. don’t use to C. used to D. am used to


24. Please, stop... I’m trying to finish a letter to Y&Y Green Group


A. talk B. talked C. talks D. talking
25. Scouting………..in England in 1907


A. began B. begin C. begined D. begins


<b>6. A</b> <b>7.B</b> <b>8.D</b> <b>9.C</b> <b>10.B</b> <b>11.A</b> <b>12.C</b>


<b>13.D</b> <b>14.C</b> <b>15.B</b> <b>16.B</b> <b>17.B</b> <b>18.A</b> <b>19.C</b>



<b>20.D</b> <b>21.A</b> <b>22.C</b> <b>23.C</b> <b>24.D</b> <b>25.A</b>


<b>III/Read the passage carefully then write (T) or (F) for the sentences below :</b>
Dear Mary ,


Thanks a lot for your gift . I’m very happy to hear that you had a nice holiday in Italy.
I’ve finished the school year, but I’m not very satisfied with my results . I got good
grades for all the subjects except for English . My English teacher said I wasn’t good at
it, especially speaking and writing . Although I’ve tried my best. I can’t improve my
English . Can you show me how to study it well ? I’ll be very grateful if you can drop me
a few lines about it . If only you were here , then I can learn something from you .


Write to me soon and tell all your news .By the way , send my best regards to your
parents


Regards ,
Lan Mai


<b>True or False? Write T/F before each sentence :</b>


T... 26. Mai received a gift from Mary.
T... 27. Mary had an enjoyable holiday in Italy .


F... 28. Mai is very pleased with the results of her studying .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

<b>IV/ Change the following sentences into reported speech::</b>
31. “Please give me the book, Lan”. said Hoa .


=> Hoa asked Lan to give her the book



32. Their mother said to them: " Don't make so much noise."
=> Their mother asked them not to make so much noise


33. “You should practice speaking English every day”, the teacher said.
=> The teacher said we should practice speakinh English every day.
34. “Could you help me ?” Mrs Jackson said to Mary .


=> Mrs Jackson asked Mary to help her


35. " Don't throw things away," Miss Linda said to the students.
=> Miss Linda told the students not to throw things away.
36. He said to me: " Don't forget to post the letter."


=> He told me not to forget to post the letter.


37. " Can you open your bag, please?" the customs officers said.
=> The customs officers asked me to open my bag.


38. My mother said to me: “ Try your best next semester”.
=> My mother asked me to try my best the following semester.
39. The policeman said to Mr.Lam: “Move your car away”
=> The policeman told Mr.Lam to move his car away.
40. “Don’t talk in class,please”, The teacher said to us
=> The teacher asked us not to talk in class.


<b>IV. Homework.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

<b>Date of teaching: /12/2011 </b>
<b>Period 46: Unit 8 : </b>

<b>COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE</b>




<i>Lesson 1 . Getting started + listen and read</i>
I, <b>Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can read and understand about the differences between
the country life and the city life


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


*Vocabularies: view, traffic-jam, peaceful, permanently, remote, facility,
accessible, definitely, relative


*Grammar: review the present progressive tense, and comparative, superlative
*Skills: Listening, reading.


<b>III,Teaching aids</b>:<b> </b>


- Book, tape, cassette, picture….
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1,<b>Warm up</b>



<b>-</b> T asks some questions :


+ Do you live in the country or in the city
?


+ Have you ever been to the country?
+ How is the country life ?


+ How is the city life ?


<b>-</b> Ss guess to make a list of the


differences between the the country
and the city.


<b>-</b> Some Ss write on the board
<b>-</b> T corrects mistakes


2, <b>Presentation</b>


- T introduces about the content of the
dialogue


<b>-</b> Plays the tape one time, Ss listen
and find newwords


<b>-</b> Guides Ss to read newwords


- Explains the new structure
3,<b>Practice </b>



<b>-</b> listen to the tape (twice)
<b>-</b> Ss read after the tape


I,<b>Getting started</b>


* Make a list of the differences between
the countryside and the city


City Country
- noisy - quiet
- pollution - fresh air
- tall building - small house
- unfriendly - friendly
- kinds of goods - farm products
- processed food - fresh food
- traffic-jam - dusty road
- entertainments - beautiful views
II, <b>Listen and read</b>


<b>-</b> relative (n)


<b>-</b> permanently (adv)
<b>-</b> remote (adj)


<b>-</b> medical facility (n)
<b>-</b> accessible (adj):
<b>-</b> province (n)


<b>-</b> definitely (adv)= certainly


<b>-</b> in many ways :


* TV is bringing not only information
but also entertainment


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>

<b>-</b> Ss work in pairs (2’)


<b>-</b> Calls some pairs to read again
<b>-</b> T asks some questions:


+ Did Na go to Kim Lien village?
+ Did she go there at the weekend?
+ Does she want to live there?
+ Are remote areas getting TV/
electricity.?


+ Are medical facilities more easily
accessible ?


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to read the dialogue again
to find the answers (Exlains the
differences questions)


<b>-</b> Work in pairs (3’)


<b>-</b> Some Ss ask and answer
<b>-</b> Some Ss write on the board
- T corrects mistakes


4,<b>Production</b>



- Asks Ss to talk about their opinions
about the city life and the country life
- Asks Ss to say something about the
differences between the city life and the
country life.


5, <b> Homework</b>


2, <b>Answer the questions</b>:


a, Na has been to Kim Lien village
b, She was there for the weekend
c, The country is peaceful and quiet
d, She means that there are no libraries,
no movies, no zoos…to go.


e, Some of the changes that Hoa mentions
are electricity and medical facilities


f, I prefer the country because it is quiet
and the air is fresh (etc)


- learn by heart newwords


- read and translate the dialogue


- write the differences between the city
and the country



- prepare Speaking.


<b>Date of teaching: /12/2011 </b>
<b>Period 47: Unit 8 : </b>

<b>COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE</b>



<i>Lesson 2 </i> <i>. </i><b>SPEAK + Language focus (3,4,5)</b>


I, <b>Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can talk about the changes of the town and their
hometown


<b>II./. Language content:</b>
*Vocabularies :


*Grammar: review comparative and present progressive tense
*Skill: Speaking


<b>III, Teaching aids</b>:<b> </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>



1,<b>Warm up</b>


*Check the old lesson


<b>-</b> play the game “word storm”


2, <b>Pre-speaking</b>


<b>-</b> T show the pictures and asks Ss to
tell something about 2 pictures
<b>-</b> T gives example


<b>-</b> Remind about the present
progressive tense.


<b>-</b> T writes the word prompts on the
board and guides Ss how to make
sentences.


3,<b>While- speaking</b>


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to work in pairs (2’)
<b>-</b> Some Ss say before class
<b>-</b> T corrects mistakes


- Guides Ss how to speak about the
hometown


<b>-</b> T gives some prompts
<b>-</b> Ss work in groups



<b>-</b> Some Ss say before class
<b>-</b> T corrects mistakes
4,<b>Post-speaking</b>


<b>-</b> Some excellent Ss say about the
changes of their school.


<b>-</b> Repeat how to talk about the
changes


( using the present progressive tense )
<b>*Language focus</b>


- T explains how to do this exercise
<b>-</b> Ss read in silence and complete
<b>-</b> Some Ss give the answers


<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes


<b>-</b> Two pairs of Ss read again these
dialogues


<b>1,Look at the two pictures. Talk about </b>
<b>the changes of the town</b>


Ex: The town is becoming busier.
- house - tall, beautiful


<b>-</b> streets - noisy


<b>-</b> traffic - modern
<b>-</b> goods - expensive
<b>-</b> air - polluted


+ The houses are getting taller and more
beautiful


+ The streets are becoming nosier.
+ Goods is becoming more expensive
+ The air is getting more polluted
+ There are more green trees


+ The town is becoming more beautiful.


<b>2, Working with a partner. Talk about </b>
<b>changes in your hometown.</b>


Ex: My hometown is getting electricity
<b>-</b> The trees – green


<b>-</b> The hometown – traffic lights/
noisy and busy


<b>-</b> Streets – dirty


<b>-</b> The house – tall, big
<b>-</b> Many shops , stores


<b>Exercise</b>



<b>3, Complete the sentences. Use the </b>
<b>verbs and adjectives in the boxes</b>


b, The old men are getting weak


c, We should go home. It is getting dark
d, The weather is becoming cold


e, The students are getting better


f, The school yard is becoming cleaner


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

<b>-</b> T explains how to do the exercise
<b>-</b> Ss read and complete in pairs


<b>-</b> Some Ss read their sentences before
class


<b>-</b> T corrects mistakes


Guides Ss how to do exercise and asks Ss
to repeat the comparative of short adj and
long adj


<b>-</b> Ss work in pairs


<b>-</b> Some Ss write down on the board
<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes.


- asks Ss to read the advertisements.


<b>-</b> guides Ss to make sentences
<b>-</b> work in pairs


<b>-</b> some Ss write on the board
<b>-</b> corrects mistakes


5,<b>Homework</b>


Ex: The city life is busier and more
expensive than the country life.


<b>-</b> The food in the country is fresher
and cheaper than in the country
<b>-</b> The transport in the city is more


accessible than in the country
( etc..)


<b>5, Compare the house, the villa and the</b>
<b>apartment.</b>


<b>-</b> The house is more expensive than
the apartment


<b>-</b> The villa is the most expensive
<b>-</b> The villa is smaller than the house
<b>-</b> The apartment is the smallest


(etc..)



- Write 5 sentences to talk about the
changes of your school or your


hometown


- prepare for Listening


<b>Date of teaching: /12/2011 </b>
<b>Period 48: Unit 8 : </b>

<b>COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE</b>



<i>Lesson 3 . </i><b>LISTEN + Language focus (1,2)</b>
I<b>, Objectives</b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen to the tape and fill in the
missing words


<b>II./. Language content:</b>
*Vocabularies:


*Grammar: review the present progressive tense
*Skill: Listening.


<b>III,Teaching aids</b>:<b> </b>


- Book, tape, cassette….
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings



- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1,<b>Warm up</b>


+ Check the old lesson:


- Ss say about the changes of their
hometown


2, <b>Pre-listening</b>.<b> </b>


<b>-</b> T introduces about the content of
the dialogue


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

3, <b>While- listening</b>


<b>-</b> Plays the tape (1 time first)


<b>-</b> Ss listen sentence by sentence to get
information to fill in each blank.
<b>-</b> Compare with the partner


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to give the answers
<b>-</b> Listen again and check.
4,<b>Post </b>–<b>listening</b>


- Asks some pairs of Ss to read the


dialogue again


- T asks some questions:


+ Who are talking on the phone?
+ Where is Aunt Hang phoning from?
+ What is she telling?


+ When is she coming to visit Lan?
*<b>Language focus</b>


<b>Present progressive tense</b>


<b> S + be + Ving + …</b>


<b>-</b> asks some pairs of Ss to read the
dialogue


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to read the shipping
information


<b>-</b> Guides Ss to make similar
dialogues (in pairs)


<b>-</b> Some pairs of Ss ask and answer
<b>-</b> T corrects mistakes


<b>-</b> T explains how to do this exercise
<b>-</b> Ss read in silence and complete
<b>-</b> Some Ss give the answers



<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes


<b>-</b> Two pairs of Ss read again these
dialogues


5, <b>Homework</b>


1.Listen and fill in the missing words
(1) that (8) arriving


(2) this (9) Thursday
(3) It’s (10) late
(4) Where (11) afternoon
(5) from (12) speak
(6) coming (13) my
(7) week (14) get


<b>Exercise</b>


<b>1, Read the dialogues. Then make </b>
<b>similar dialogues</b>


a, A: Is that boat to Qui Nhon leaving
at 11.30 ?


B: Is that Good Fortune ?
A: That’s right.


B: I’m very sorry, madam, but it’s


been delayed.


A: Oh, no .


B: Now, it’s leaving at 13.55
b, A: Is the boat from Ca Mau
arriving at 11.00 ?


B: Are you taking about Diamond
Eyes?


A: Yes.


B: It’s arriving on time.


<b>2, Complete the dialogues</b>


(1) are doing
(2) am watching
(3) am going
(4) are cleaning
(5) am having


- read the dialogue again
<b>-</b> Prepare for Reading.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

<b>Date of teaching: </b>


<b>Period 49: Unit 8 : </b>

<b>COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE</b>


<i>Lesson 4 </i> <i>. </i>

<b>Read</b>





I, <b>Objectives</b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss can read and understand the content of the text about
the differences between the city life and the country life


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


*Vocabularies: rural, struggle, typhoon, drought, flood, increase, strain, tragedy,
urban, migrant.


*Grammar: Review present progressive tense
*Skill: reading comprehension


<b>III,Teaching aids</b>:<b> </b>


- Book, extra board,….
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1,<b>Warm up</b>



- Say something about the differences
between the city and the country
2, <b> Pre-reading</b>


- T asks some questions:


+ Do many people from rural areas move
to live in the city nowadays?


+ Why do they want to go to the city?
( good jobs, earn more money, better
facilities…)


+ What happens when so many people
move to the city?( overcrowd


population increase, strain,…)
- Through the guiding questions , T
introduces some newwords


- T introduces the content of the text
and reads the text first, Ss listen and find
newwords


<b>-</b> Guides Ss to read newwords
- Some Ss read newwords again


Newwords:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

3,<b>While- reading</b>



- Asks Ss to read the text in silence (2’)
- Asks some questions:


+ Where are many people from the
countryside leaving their house to go and
live?


+ Do these people feel that the city has
more well-paying jobs ?


+ What does the increased population
create? What does it put a strain on?


+ Is this a problem for the governments all
over the world?


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to work in pairs to
complete the summary (2’)
<b>-</b> Some Ss give the answers
<b>-</b> T corrects mistakes


- Calls some Ss to read the summary
again.


+ Guides Ss how to do this exercise
<b>-</b> Ss work in silence (2)


<b>-</b> Some Ss give the results
<b>-</b> T corrects mistakes



4, <b>Post - reading</b>


<b>-</b> Translate the text


<b>-</b> Call on some sts to read the
translates.


5, <b>Homework</b>


1,Complete the summary:


(1)leaving (2)home/ traditional way of
life


(3)city (4)rural


(5)city (6)overcrowding/problems
(7)schools (8)hospitals


(9)problem (10)world.


2, Find the word in the passage that
means:


a, of the countryside – rural
b, as many as needed - plentiful


c, become greater and larger- increase
d, a great pressure – strain



e, a terrible event – tragedy
f, of the city or city life – urban.


<b>-</b> learn by heart newwords; read
and translate + summarize the
text


<b>-</b> Prepare for Writing.


<b>Date of teaching:</b>


<b>Period 50: Unit 8 : </b>

<b>COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE</b>


<i>Lesson 5 </i> <i>. </i>

<b>Write</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

I<b>, Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can write a letter about their neighborhood
<b>II./. Language content:</b>


*Vocabularies:


*Grammar: Review simple present.
*Skill: writing.


<b>III,Teaching aids</b>:<b> </b>


Book, extra board…
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>



<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1, <b> Warm up</b>


Check the old lesson: “ word storm”


2,<b> Pre-writing</b>


- guides Ss how to do this exercise
<b>-</b> Asks Ss to put the outline for an


informal letter in the correct order
in pairs (2’)


<b>-</b> Some Ss give the answers
3, <b>While-writing</b>


<b>-</b> Guides Ss how to write a letter
from these answers


<b>-</b> Ss work in pairs (8’). Then correct
mistakes themslves


<b>-</b> Two Ss write on the board



4, <b> Post-writing</b>


<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes


<b>-</b> Calls some Ss to read their letters
before class


5<b>, Homework</b>


1, <b> Put the outline for an informal letter</b>
<b>in the correct order.</b>


<b>-</b> Heading: +) writer’s address
+) date


<b>-</b> opening : Dear…
<b>-</b> body of letter
<b>-</b> closing.


2, <b>Write a letter to a friend about your</b>
<b>neighborhood</b>


Ex; 008 Li Cong Uan Street
December 30th<sub>, 2004</sub>


Dear Nga,


I’m glad to receive your letter. I’ll tell
you about my neighborhood. I live in a


small town. My family has a small house
with 4 rooms. My room is very lovely.
Every morning, I get up and look through
my bedroom window. There are some
small birds and many flowers outside the
window. My house is near the school so I
often walk to school.


In my neighborhood, there is a library,
a park, …, but I like the swimming pool
best because I often go swimming with
my friends on weekends.


How about you? Is there anything
interesting where you live?


Write to me soon.


All my love,


<b>-</b> Write a letter to your friend
Parts of the


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

<b>==============================================================</b>


<b>Date of teaching: </b>


<b>Period 51: </b> ôn tập học kì 1





<b>I, Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson Ss can be reviewed how to use the simple past, the
present perfect tenses


<b>II./. Language content:</b>
<b>-</b> form of the verbs
<b>-</b> prepositions of time
<b>-</b> reflexive pronouns
*Skills: writing, speaking.


<b>III, Teaching aids: </b>


Book, extraboard….
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

2,<b>Presentation</b>


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to retell the adv, the use and
the form of each tense



- Make sentences with each tense


- retell the forms of the verbs and make
sentences


3, <b>Practice</b>


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to do exercises


<b>-</b> Calls Ss to write the correct form of
the verbs on the board


<b>-</b> T corrects mistakes


- Guides Ss how to do this exercise
<b>-</b> Asks Ss to work in silence (2’)
- Ss give the answers and explain


<b>-</b> corrects mistakes


4, <b>Production</b>


- repeats the main structures
5, <b>Homework</b>


I, <b>Tenses</b>


1, The simple past tense
Adv: Yesterday, last, ago
Form: (+) <b>S + Ved/ 2 + O</b>



<b> (-) S + didn t + V + O</b>’


<b> (?) Did + S + V + O?</b>


2, The present perfect tense
Adv: since, for


Form: <b>(+) S + have / has + P.P…..</b>
<b> (-) S + haven t/ hasn t + P.P</b>’ ’
<b>…</b>


<b> (?) Have/ Has + S + P.P …?</b>


II<b>, Form of the verbs </b>
1, Add “ing” behind the verbs
following : love, like, hate, enjoy,
prepositions…


2, Add “to” in front of the verbs
following: ask, tell,say…


3, Infinitive : following modal verbs ,
used to,…


III, <b> Exercise</b>:<b> </b>


1, Put the verbs in correct form.
a, Did Nam use to (play) soccer ?
b, Yesterday, I (ride) my bike to


school


c, Do you enjoy (work) at night ?
d, We (be) here since last week
d, How long you (know) Miss Thu ?
I (know) her for five years .


E, You (see) Nam at the party
yesterday?


No. I (not see) him for some days
2, Choose the correct words


a) He’ll come here … (on, in at)
May 5th


b) She made this dress … (herself,
himself, myself)


c) You must … (learn, to learn,
learning) harder


d) We have lived here … ( for, since,
in) 1980


e) My Mom told me … (buy, to buy,
buying) some food


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

<b>Date of teaching: </b>



<b>Period 52 </b> «n tËp häc k× 1


I<b>, Objectives</b>


- By the end of the lesson Ss can be reviewed the structures :
+ enough + toV


+ reported speech
+ comparison
 skills: speaking and writing
II, <b>Teaching aids</b> :


- Book, chalk…
III, <b> Procedures</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


1, <b>Warm up</b>


- Write the form of 2 tenses
2, <b> Presentation</b>


- Ss retell the structures of the reported
speech and make some sentences


3, <b> Practice</b>



<b>-</b> Asks Ss to do exercise
<b>-</b> Work in pairs (2’)


<b>-</b> Some Ss write n the board
<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes


- Repeat the structures of the comparison
and make sentences


1, <b>Reported speech</b>


+ Commands, requests in reported speech:
- S + ask/ tell + O + to-V …..


+ Advices in reported speech:
- S1+ say + S2 + should + V…..


- S1+ advice + O + to-V……


Ex: “ You should change the way to learn
English”


<b>-</b> Ba said Lan should change the ….
* <b>Exercise</b>: Change these sentences into
reported speech


a, “ Can you lend me your history book ”
b, “ You should study harder ”



c, “ Please give this letter to your Mom”
d, “ You ought to tidy your room”


<b>2, Comparison of adj</b>


<i>a, Equality</i> :


S1+ be(not) + as + adj + as + S2


Ex:Your shirt is(not) as new as my shirt
b,Similarity


+ different from > < the same as:
Ex:Trung is different from his mother


<b>-</b> S1 + be + different from + S2


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>

- compare the differences between the
equality and comparative


<b>-</b> Guides Ss to do exercise
<b>-</b> Work in pairs (2’)


<b>-</b> Calls some Ss to write on the board
<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes


<b>4, Production</b>


- guides Ss to write the passages about the
changes of their hometown; describe a


person or a room


5,<b>Homework</b>


<i>c, Comparative</i>


<b> S1 + be + short adj +ER + than + S2</b>


<b> more + long adj</b>


*<b>Exercise</b> :Rewrite these sentences:
a) Your bike is newer than my bike


My bike ……….


b) Hoa is more intelligent than her sister
Her sister ………..
c) The city life is busier than the country


life


The country life ……….
d) Your bag is different from my bag


My bag isn’t ………...
e) Nobody is taller than Nam


Nam is ………


* Ex 1 (5)


Ex 5 (9)
Ex 3 (16)


<b>-</b> learn by heart the structures
<b>-</b> review how to do exercise


<b>-</b> prepare for the first semester test


<b>Period 53 week 18 </b>

<b>KiĨm tra häc k× i </b>


Time: 45 minutes



I, <b>Objectives</b>


- check the following knowledge:


+ The simple past tense+ The present perfect tense+ Form of verbs
+ Comparison+ Reported speech


II, <b>Content</b>


Thi theo đề của phòng giáo dục.


<b>Period 54 week 18 </b>

<b>chữa bài</b>

<b>Kiểm tra häc k× i </b>



I.Objective


By the end of the lesson, help students understand clearly about the written test show
the students’ mistakes and explain to them


II. Preparation



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

-Use the poster or ask the best student to
write on the boars.


-Let sts work in groups


-Give the task for the mornitor of the group
-Give the explanation for those ones.


-Write the anwer key.
-Look through all of them


-Ask for explanation if you don’t
understand .


-Discuss and correct in groups.


-Write down some sentences that they
can’t understand or they have no
explanation.


<b>* Answers</b>


<b>C©u I: ( 2,5®) Em h·y ®iỊn mét tõ thÝch hợp nhất vào chỗ trống trong các câu sau:</b>


1. as 2,favor 3, for you 4, In / to / by
5, in 6, from 7, about


<b>Câu II: ( 2đ) Em hãy viết dạng đúng của động từ trong ngợăc trong các câu sau.</b>



1. gets/ got
2. have played
3. reading


<b>Câu III: ( 1đ) Em hÃy viiết lại câu sau bắt đầu bằng từ gợi ý.</b>


1. Hoa asked Nam to give him a pen
2. Hung told me to open the door


<b>Câu IV: ( 2,5đ) Hoàn thành bức th sau, sử dụng từ gợi ý đã cho.</b>


1. I’m happy to teel you that I am going to join the y & Y Green group.


2. We are going to plant trees in the school gardenand water them after school.
3. We’ll collect used paper, cans, and send them for recycling.


4. We clean the school yard everyafternoon.


5. we hope to give more green color to our school.


<b>C©u V: ( 2đ) Đọc đoạn văn sau.</b>


<b>* in T (ỳng) F ( sai ) vào đầu các câu sau.</b>


<b>1, F 2, T 3, F 4, T</b>


<b>Teaching date: 11- 01-2011</b>


<b>Period 55: </b>

<b>Unit 9 : A FIRST-AID COURSE</b>




<i><b>Lesson 1. </b></i> <b>Getting started + listen and read</b>


I, <b>Objectives </b>:<b> </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can read and understand the content of the
dialogue about first-aid


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


*Vocabularies: bleed, sting, emergency, ambulance, conscious, wound,
pressure, hankerchief, require, to keep sbd awake


*Grammar: review the simple future tense
*Skills: Listening, reading.


<b>III, Teaching aids: </b>


Book, tape, cassette, picture...
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1,<b>Warm up</b>


<b>-</b> T introduces the topic of the lesson by
asking some questions



+ Look at the picture and tell me where it
is.


+ What is the doctor doing ?


<b>-</b> Asks Ss name each thing in the
picture (T gives some newwords)
<b>-</b> Guides Ss to read newwords


- Guides Ss to give the ways in order to
solve these situations


- Ss work in pairs


<b>-</b> Some Ss say before class.


2, <b>Presentation</b>


- T introduces about the content of the
dialogue


<b>-</b> Ss find newwords


<b>-</b> Guides Ss to read newwords


- Introduces some structures and phrases
- guides Ss to make some sentenses
- retell how to use the simple future
3,<b>Practice</b>



<b>-</b> listen to the tape (twice)


<b>-</b> guides Ss to read in chorus (once)
<b>-</b> Ss work in pairs (2’)


<b>-</b> Calls some pairs to read again
<b>-</b> T asks some questions:


+ What happened with a student?
+ Where is Quang Trung school?
+ Did she have a bad cut on her arm?
+ What time will the ambulance be
there?


- T guides Ss to read and select the


I, <b> Getting started</b>


- first-aid (n): cứu thơng


<b>-</b> cotton ball (n): Cuộn bông
<b>-</b> tiger balm (n): Dầu con hổ
<b>-</b> bandage (n): băng


<b>-</b> ice bag (n): tỳi ỏ


<b>-</b> bleed (v) bled- bled: chảy
máu


<b>-</b> sting (v) – stung – stung: đốt,


chích


a, A girl has a burn on her arm
Ex: I’ll use cold water to wash the
pain.


b, A boy has a bad cut on his leg
-I’ll cover it with a bandage and
take him to the hospital.


c, A girl has a nose bleed


-I’ll use some cotton to cover her
nose bleed for some minutes
d, A boy has a bee sting


<b>-</b> I’ll wash it with alcohol and
put some tiger balm on it
II, <b>Listen and read</b>


<b>-</b> Emergency (n)
<b>-</b> Ambulance (n)
<b>-</b> Calm down
<b>-</b> Conscious (a)
<b>-</b> Handkerchief (n)
<b>-</b> Wound (n)


<b>-</b> Tight (a)
<b>-</b> Fall asleep (v)



+ to put pressure on sbd/ sth: đè lên..
+ to keep sbd awake:


1,<b>Practice the dialogue</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

topics


- Ss work in pairs (2’)


- some Ss give the answers and explain
- corrects mistakes


4,<b>Production</b>


- Asks Ss to retell the methods to stop the
bleeding


5, <b>Homework</b>


a,
b,
c,
e,
f,


- learn the newwords by heart and
solve some situations which require
first-aid


- prepare Speaking



<b>Teaching date:13/01/2011</b>


<b>Period 56: </b>

<b>Unit 9 : A FIRST-AID COURSE</b>



<i><b>Lesson 2. </b></i> <b>Speak + Language focus 4</b>


I, <b>Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to make and respond to requests, offers
and promises


<b>II./. Language content:</b>
*Vocabularies :


*Grammar: review modal verbs; The simple future tense
*Skill: Speaking


<b>III, Teaching aids: </b>


Book, extra board, ...
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>



1,<b>Warm up</b>


*Check the old lesson
<b>-</b> Word storm


2, <b> Pre-speaking</b>


<b>-</b> Ss read the requests, offers,
promises in the box


<b>-</b> T explains them and guides how to
use


<b>-</b> Some Ss make requests or offers or


<b> * Requests</b>


- Can/ Could you + V
-Will/Would you + V


<b>* Offers:</b>


- Will/Shall/Can I + v
- Would you like me + toV.


<b>* Promises:</b>


- I promise. I will + V
- I promise I won’t


- I promise + to V


<b>* Respond</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

promises and the others respond


3,<b>While- speaking</b>


-Asks Ss to look at the pictures and read
example


-Ss tell the situation in each picture
b, a boy has a headache


c, a boy has a bad cut on his leg
d, a woman has a bad cold


e, a boy is holding the ball with a broken
vase


- Guides Ss how to use the requests, offers,
promises and responses with each


situation


<b>-</b> work in pairs (2’)


<b>-</b> some pairs of Ss ask and answer
<b>-</b> T corrects mistakes.



4, <b> Post-speaking</b>


-Asks Ss to make and respond to requests,
offers, promises about themselves.


<b>* Language focus 4</b>


- T explains the demand of the exercise
and gives an example


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to look at the picture and
make sentences with each picture.
(using the words in the box)


<b>-</b> Ss work in pairs


<b>-</b> Some Ss read their sentences
<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes


5, <b>Homework</b>


Sure/ OK....
I’m sorry, I can’t
Yes, please.
No, thank you
I hope so/ Good
I’m glad


Don’t forget



* Work with a partner. Make and
respond to requests and offers or
promises


b,Can I get you some medicine?
<b>-</b> Yes, please.


c,Could I get you a bandage?
<b>-</b> It’s very kind of you.


Or: Can you get me a bandage ?
<b>-</b> O.K


d Shall I get you some medicine?
Yes, please


e I promise I won’t do it again
I hope so


<b>4, Work with a partner. Make </b>
<b>requests, offers or promises.Use the </b>
<b>words in the box and will or shall </b>.
b,Will you paint the door, please ?
I’ll paint the door next Sunday.
c,Will you study harder, please ?
I promise I’ll study harder.


d, Will you carry the basket for me?
Shall I carry the basket for you?
e,Will you hang the washing, please?


Shall I hang the washing for you ?
f, Will you cut the grass , please ?
I’ll cut the grass for you.


- learn by heart newwords, requests,
offers,promises and make similar
dialogues


-prepare for listening


<b>Teaching date: 15/01/2011</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

<i><b> Lesson 3. </b></i><b> Listen + Language 2, 3</b>


I, <b>Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen and match the correct words
and put them in the correct order.


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


*Vocabularies :strecher, crutch, scale, wheelchair, eye chart, paramedic, patient,
eyesight, lean, baby.


*Grammar: review present progressive tense
*Skill: listening


<b>III, Teaching aids: </b>


Book, tape, cassette...


<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1,<b>Warm up</b>


*Check the previous lesson


- Two Ss make and respond to request or
offer.


2, <b>Pre-listening</b>


<b>-</b> Ss name the things in the picture
+What’s each person in the picture
doing ?


<b>-</b> gives newwords


<b>-</b> guides Ss to read newwords


- guides Ss how to listen and match
3,<b>While-listening</b>



<b>-</b> listen to the tape (2 times)


<b>-</b> Ss listen and match the letters to
the correct words


<b>-</b> check the results with their friends
<b>-</b> Some Ss give the results


<b>-</b> Listen again to check the answer
<b>-</b> Plays the tape again, Ss listen and


put the letters in correct order
<b>-</b> Some Ss give the answers
<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes


4,<b>Post-listening</b>


* Match the letters A, B, C, D, E, or F
to the correct words in the box, then
put them in the correct order you hear
<b>-</b> strecher (n): cáng


<b>-</b> crutch (n) : nạng
<b>-</b> wheelchair (n) :xe lăn
<b>-</b> scale (n) : cân


<b>-</b> eye chart (n): bảng đo thị lực


<b>-</b> paramedic (n): Ngời phụ giúp công
việc y tế



<b>-</b> patient (n): bệnh nhân


<b>-</b> eyesight (n): Thị lực, tầm nhìn
<b>-</b> lean (v): dựa, tựa, chống


<b>-</b> baby (n): a trẻ sơ sinh
* Answer keys:


A,ambulance
B, wheelchair
C, crutches
D, eye chart
E, scale
F, stretcher


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>

- Asks Ss some questions:
+ Where is a nurse pushing the
wheelchair?


+ Where are the crutches?


+ Is there a patient on the stretcher?
+ Where is the eye chart?


<b>* Language focus 2, 3</b>


<b>-</b> T explains how to use Modal verbs
“will/ shall”



<b>-</b> Shows the extra board
- asks Ss to work in pairs (2’)


<b>-</b> some Ss write on the board
<b>-</b> corrects mistakes


<b>-</b> some pairs of Ss read again.


- T repeats how to use the request with
“Will you + V..”.


<b>-</b> Ss look at the picture and make
sentences


<b>-</b> Work in pairs


<b>-</b> Some pairs of Ss read before class
<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes


5,<b>Homework:</b>


<i><b>2, Complete the dialogue.Use the </b></i>
<i><b>correct word or short form.</b></i>


(1) will
(2) will
(3) won’t
(4) shall
(5) will
(6) ’ll



<b>3, Look at the picture and complete </b>
<b>the sentences.Use the words under </b>
<b>each picture and will.</b>


b, Will you give it to me, please?
c, Will you answer the telephone,
please?


d, Will you turn on the T.V, Nga?
e, Will you pour a glass of water for
me?


f, Will you get me a cushion, please?
<b>-</b> learn by heart newwords
<b>-</b> prepare reading




<b>Teaching date:18/01/2011</b>


<b>Period 58:</b> Unit 9 : A FIRST-AID COURSE


<i><b>Lesson 4. </b></i><b> Read+ Language focus 1</b>


I, <b>Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can read and understand the content of the
text about the first-aid. Then find out the neccessary information
<b>II./. Language content:</b>



* Vocabularies: fainting, elevate, victim, minimize, revive, tissue, ease, sterile
dressing, overheat, force.


* Grammar: Review modal verbs
* Skill: reading comprehension


<b>III, Teaching aids: </b>


Book, extra board,...
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

1,<b>Warm up</b>


<b>-</b> write newwords


<b>-</b> What will you do if your friend has
a burn on her arm?


2, <b> Pre-reading</b>


- T asks some questions:


+ Have you ever seen an emergency ?


+ What will you do when you see a
fainting, shock, burning person?


- T writes the ideas on the board and gives
some newwords which concern the lesson
<b>-</b> T introduces the content of the text
<b>-</b> T reads the text, Ss listen and find


newwords


<b>-</b> Guides Ss to read newwords
<b>-</b> Some Ss read newwords alone
<b>-</b> Rubs out and remember


3,<b>While- reading</b>


- Guides Ss to read the text in chorus
<b>-</b> Ss read in silence (3’) and choose


the correct case


<b>-</b> Compare the result with a partner
<b>-</b> Some Ss give the result


<b>-</b> T corrects mistakes
4, <b>Post - reading</b>


- Calls some Ss to read the text again.Then
answer some questions about the text.
+ Should the victim of fainting sit or stand?


+ Can the victim of shock drink wine?
+ What should we do to ease the burn?


<b>* Language focus 1</b>


<b>-</b> T explains how to use : in order to/
so as to


In order to/ so as to + V.... : Để làm
gì....


<b>-</b> Gives example


<b>-</b> Read all the phrases in colunm A
and B.


<b>-</b> Ss work in pairs (2’)
<b>-</b> Some Ss give the result
<b>-</b> T corrects mistakes


<b>-</b> Some Ss read the meaningful
sentences


5, <b>Homework</b>


<b>1. Newwords:</b>


<b>-</b> fainting (n)
<b>-</b> victim (n)
<b>-</b> lie flat (v)


<b>-</b> force (v)
<b>-</b> elevate (v)
<b>-</b> revive (v)
<b>-</b> overheat (v)
<b>-</b> minimize (v)
<b>-</b> tissue (n)
<b>-</b> ease (v)


<b>-</b> sterile dressing (n)


<b>II. Choose a correct case for each of</b>
<b>the following treatments.</b>


A.Fainting: a, c, e.
B.Shock: b.


C.Burns: d.


<i><b>1, Match the part of a sentence from </b></i>
<i><b>colunm A with another part in </b></i>


<i><b>colunm B. Then write a complete </b></i>
<i><b>sentence by using in order to/ so as </b></i>
<i><b>to.</b></i>


Ex: We work hard in order to / so as to
pass the exam.


1- f
2- c


3- b
4- e
5- a
6- d


<b>-</b> learn by heart newwords
<b>-</b> write the treatments for the


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

<b>Teaching date:20/1/2011</b>


<b>Period 59:</b> Unit 9 : A FIRST-AID COURSE


<i><b>Lesson 5. </b></i>

<b>Write</b>



<b>I, Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can write the thank-you note to a friend
<b>II./. Language content:</b>


* Vocabularies: cheer sbd up,


* Grammar: Review simple future and simple past tense.
* Skill: writing.


<b>III, Teaching aids: </b>


Book, extra board...
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>


- Greetings


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>
1, <b> Warm up</b>


<b>-</b> Write newwords


<b>-</b> Write some treatments for the


victim of shock or burn or fainting
2,<b> Pre-writing</b>


<b>-</b> Asks some questions :


+ What is the thank-you note?
+ When do you write it?


+ Have you ever written or got a thank-you
note?


<b>-</b> T introduces the content of the


letter


<b>-</b> Guides Ss how to complete and use


tense


<b>-</b> Ss work in pairs and give the



answers


<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes


<b>-</b> Some Ss read the letter again


3, <b>While-writing</b>


<b>1, Complete the thank-you note .Use </b>
<b>the correct tense forms of the vebs in </b>
<b>brackets</b>.


(1) was
(2) were
(3) helped
(4) came
(5) am


(6) will phone


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

<b>Teaching date:22/1/2011</b>


<b>Period 60: </b>

<b>Unit 10</b>

:

<b>RECYCLING</b>



<i><b>Lesson 1</b></i><b>.</b> <b>Getting started + listen and read</b>
<b>I, Objectives :</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can read and understand the content of the dialogue
about recycling



<b>II./. Language content:</b>


*Vocabularies: cloth, reuse, wrap, fertilizer, matter, representative, recycle,
reduce, overpackaged, paper packaging, throw.


*Grammar:Review modal verb : should
*Skills: Listening, reading.


<b>III, Teaching aids: </b>


Book, tape, cassette, picture...
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1,<b>Warm up</b>


<b>-</b> T introduces the topic of the lesson
about the damage of the garbage and
how to limit it.


<b>-</b> Asks Ss some questions :


+What should we do to reduce the


garbage?


+ Should we reuse or recycle the old
plastic bags?


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to read the example
<b>-</b> Find newwords


<b>-</b> Guides Ss to read newwords
<b>-</b> Guides Ss how to make similar


dialogues (in pairs)


<b>-</b> Some pairs of Ss say before class.
<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes.


2, <b>Presentation</b>


<b>-</b> Asks some questions :


+ What things do you often throw in the


I,<b>Getting started</b>


Ex: We should use tree leaves to wrap
things such as banana leaves, lotous
leaves.


- You are right.We should also use
garbage to make fertilizer.



- Of course. And we should use the
vegetable matter to make animal food.
- Right. I think we can reuse used papers
to make toys for children.


II, <b>Listen and read</b>


<b>-</b> throw (v)- threw-thrown
- representative (n)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

waste basket ?


+ What things can be reused? recycled?
- T introduces about the content of the
dialogue


- Plays the tape, Ss listen and find
newwords


- Guides Ss to read newwords


- Introduces some structures and phrases
- guides Ss to make some sentences.


3,<b> Practice</b>


<b>-</b> listen to the tape (twice)


<b>-</b> Guides Ss to read in chorus (once)


<b>-</b> Ss work in groups of four (2’)
<b>-</b> Calls some groups to read again
- Ss read the dialogue in silence (2’)
and find the answer for each question.
- Ss work in pairs (2’)


<b>-</b> some Ss write the answers on the
board and the others practice in
pairs


- corrects mistakes


4,<b>Production</b>


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to work in groups of four
to discuss question e)


5, <b>Homework</b>


<b>-</b> packaging (n)
<b>-</b> reduce (v)
<b>-</b> reuse (v)
<b>-</b> recycle (v)
<b>-</b> cloth (n)
<b>-</b> fertilizer (n)
<b>-</b> wrap (v)
<b>-</b> matter (n)


* It’s not difficult to remember



* I’m pleased that you want to know
more.


- S + be + adj + to-V/ noun clause
1,<b>Practice the dialogue</b>


2, <b> Answer</b>


a, Reduce means not buying things
which are overpackaged


b, We can reuse things like envelopes,
glass, plastic bottles and old plastic bags
c, Recycle means not throwing things
away. Try and find another use for them.
d, We can look for information on
recycling things by contacting with an
organization like Friends of the Earth,
going to the local library or asking our
family and friends.


e, Because plastic bags are difficult to be
destroyed.


- learn by heart the newwords
- read and translate the dialogue
- prepare Speak + listen


<b>Teaching date:25/1/2011</b>



<b>Period 61: </b>

<b>Unit 10</b>

:

RECYCLING



<i><b>Lesson 2</b></i><b>. </b>

<b>Speak + Listen</b>


I, <b>Objectives</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

*Vocabularies : fabric, compost, metal, leather.
*Grammar: review modal verbs can , should.
*Skill: Speaking


<b>III, Teaching aids: </b>


Book, pictures, ...
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1,<b>Warm up</b>


* Check the old lesson
<b>-</b> Write newwords


<b>-</b> Read the dialogue and answer
questions



<b>2. Speak</b>


*<b>Pre-speaking</b>


<b>-</b> T shows the picture and asks some
questions:


+ What are they? (They are types of
garbage such as: paper, glass, plastic...)
+ Why do we need to group those things?
(in order to reuse and recycle)


- gives some newwords and guides Ss to
read


- Asks Ss to read the words in the box,
then decide which group each item
belongs to in pairs (2’)


*<b>While- speaking</b>


- Asks Ss to read example and guides Ss
how to do


<b>-</b> Ss work in pairs(2’)


<b>-</b> Some pairs of Ss practise asking
and answering before class.
<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes.



*<b>Post-speaking</b>


<b>-</b> some Ss say again the intructions to
reuse, reduce or recycle sth


<b></b>


<b>-3. Listen</b>


*<b>Pre- listening</b>


- T introduces the content of the listening
(about the methods make the compost)
<b>-</b> Asks Ss to guess how to make compost
( Tgives some newwords )


<b>I.Speaking:</b>


<b>1. Work with a partner.</b>


- plastic (n)
<b>-</b> metal (n)
<b>-</b> fabric (n)
<b>-</b> leather (n)
<b>-</b> compost (n)


+ Paper: used paper, old newspapers,
books, paper boxes,..


+ Glass: bottles, glasses, jars,...


+ Plastic: plastic bags/ bottles...
+ Metal: food cans, drinking cans, ...
+ Vegetable matter: fruit peels,
vegetables


+ Fabric: clothes, pieces of material,..
+ Leather: shoes, sandals, school bags


<b>2. Practice:</b>


Ex1:


- Which group do plastic bags belong
to?


<b>-</b> Put them in “ plastic ”


- What can we do with those bags ?
- We can reuse them. (etc..)


Ex2: - Are sandals “leather”?


- That’s right.


- What will we do with them?
- We can collect and recycle them.
Ex: We can collect and recycle old
newspapers, used papers.(etc)


<b>II. Listening: </b>


<b>1. Newwords</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

- Guides Ss to read newwords
- Guides Ss how to listen and get
information


*<b>While- listening</b>


- Plays the tape (3 times)


- Ss listen and check the result themselves
- Some Ss give the results


- Plays the tape again to check the answer
* <b>Post-listening</b>


- some Ss say the methods to make
compost


4. <b>Homework</b>


<b>-</b> shell (n): vá
<b>-</b> rat (n): cht
<b>-</b> shovel (n): xỴng


<b>-</b> sheet of plastic (n): tÊm nhùa
<b>-</b> condensation (n): sù ngng lại
<b>-</b> moisture (n):hơi ẩm


<b>2. Listen and choose correct answer: </b>



Answer keys:
a, A


b, B
c, B


d, B


<b>-</b> learn by heart newwords
<b>-</b> write some sentences to say


about reducing garbage


<b>Teaching date:27/1/2011</b>


<b>Period 62: </b>

<b> Unit 10</b>

:

<b>RECYCLING</b>



<i><b>Lesson 3</b></i><b>. </b>

<i><b>Read</b></i>


<b>I.Objective</b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to give and respond instructions
<b>II./. Language content:</b>


*Vocabularies : tire, melt , deposit, refill, pipe.
*Grammar: Passive- Form in the present Simple
*Skill: Reading


<b>III, Teaching aids: </b>



Picture , a mapped dialogue chart
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>




<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1-<b>Warm up</b>


- Tell Ss the topic about the environment


<b>Word square</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

and there are 12 hidden words .
- Divide the class into 4 groups .


- Ask Ss to write their answers on a piece
of paper and hand in when they finish
- Tell Ss the group with the most right
words is the winner .


Answer key :


environment ,


garbage , pure , used paper , protect .
envelope , dust , green tree
plastic , paper bag ,
reduce , reuse , recycle
2- <b>Pre </b>–<b> reading</b> :


Introduce the topic of the passage


reading and some new words to students
- Get Ss to copy in their notebooks .
* Checking vocabulary :


Rub out and remember


- Tell Ss they are going to read a page in
a newspaper giving some recycling facts
to protect the environment .


- Ask them to look at the board and guess
what they are going to read .


+ What do people do with used things ?
+ What can they make from them ?
- Call on some Ss to read their guesses on
the board


3- <b>While </b>–<b> reading</b> :


- Draw the grid on the board and have Ss
copy it



- Ask Ss to open their books and read the
text .


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to make a list of
recycling facts mentioned in the text .
- Call on some Ss to write the


information in the grid on the board .


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to answer the
questions .


- Get them to compare their answers with
their friends .


- Call on some pairs to practice asking
and answering the questions .


- Give feedback


<b>N</b> <b>B</b> <b>C</b> <b>G</b> <b>A</b> <b>R</b> <b>B</b> <b>A</b> <b>G</b>
<b>V</b> <b>E</b> <b>D</b> <b>R</b> <b>D</b> <b>O</b> <b>P</b> <b>P</b> <b>U</b>
<b>E</b> <b>J</b> <b>U</b> <b>E</b> <b>Y</b> <b>I</b> <b>L</b> <b>A</b> <b>R</b>
<b>L</b> <b>U</b> <b>S</b> <b>E</b> <b>D</b> <b>P</b> <b>A</b> <b>P</b> <b>E</b>
<b>O</b> <b>S</b> <b>T</b> <b>N</b> <b>O</b> <b>T</b> <b>S</b> <b>E</b> <b>D</b>
<b>P</b> <b>R</b> <b>O</b> <b>T</b> <b>E</b> <b>C</b> <b>T</b> <b>R</b> <b>U</b>
<b>E</b> <b>A</b> <b>B</b> <b>R</b> <b>C</b> <b>A</b> <b>I</b> <b>B</b> <b>C</b>
<b>R</b> <b>E</b> <b>C</b> <b>E</b> <b>E</b> <b>N</b> <b>C</b> <b>A</b> <b>E</b>
<b>D</b> <b>E</b> <b>E</b> <b>E</b> <b>F</b> <b>G</b> <b>H</b> <b>G</b> <b>I</b>



<b>I.Vocabulary</b> :


- tire (n) : using picture
- pipe (n) : using drawing
- deposit (n) :


- to refill = to fill something empty again
- to melt >< to freeze


<b>II. Open prediction</b>


Car ties -> …………..
Milk bottles ->………
Glass -> …………..
Drink cans -> …………..


Household and garden waste -> ………


<b>III. Grid </b>


Answer Key :


Used things Recycling Facts
Car tires
Milk bottles
Glass
Drink cans
Household and
garden waste



are recycled to make pipes and
floor recoverings


are cleaned and refilled
(with milk )


is broken up , melted and made
into new glassware


are brought back for recycling
is made into compost


<b>IV. Comprehension questions </b>
<b>* Answers</b>


a. People cleaned and refilled empty milk
bottles .


b. The glass is broken up , melted and
made into new glassware .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

4- <b>Post </b>–<b> reading</b> :


- Ask Ss to look at their books and
complete the sentences to make a list of
recycled things .


- Call on some Ss to read their answers
aloud .



=> The sentences they have read are the
passive .


- Have Ss copy


- Call on some Ss to read their completed
sentences in front of class .


- Give feedback
* Answers


1. Pop music is liked by Lan .
2. Table tennis is played every day
3. These exercises are done in the
notebooks by us .


4. Five chickens are fed by him
5. A lot of food is bought by her


<b>5- Homework :</b>


d. Compost is made from household and
garden waste .


e. If we have a recycling story to share ,
we can call or fax the magazine at 5 265
456.


Passive Form in the present Simple



<b>S + am/ is / are + Past participle</b>


- It is used when the subject is affected by
the action of the verb .


- How to change an active sentence to a
passive voice :


Active S V O
Passive S + be + PII by
O


eg : I love you
You are loved by me


* Change these sentences into the passive
1. Lan like pop music .


2. They play table tennis every day
3. We do these exercises in the notebooks
4. He feeds 5 chickens .


5. She buy a lot of food .


- Copy down all the passive sentences in
the note books .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

<b>Teaching date:29/1/2011</b>



<b>Period 63: </b>

<b>Unit 10 : RECYCLING</b>



<i><b>Lesson 4</b></i><b>. </b>

<b>Write</b>


<b>I, Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can write the recycling instructions of old
newspapers and tea leaves.


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


*Vocabularies: soak, mix, dry, bucket, mixture, mash, wire mesh, firmly, overnight,
scatter, keep away.


*Grammar: Review simple present tense.
*Skill: writing.


<b>III, Teaching aids: </b>


Book, extra board...
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


1, <b> Warm up</b>


- Write 9 numbers on he board from 1 to 9


2. Say this sentence in he passive “ people
speak English everywhere”


3. Say this sentence in the active “
cartoons are liked by most children”
6. Say this sentence in the passive “ We
do not use things carefully”


7. Say this sentence in the active “ Are
candies liked by the children ?”


8. Say this sentence in the passive “ Mr
Han teaches Maths.”


9. Say this sentence in the passive
“Vegetables do not eat meat.”
- Divide the class into 2 teams .
2,<b> Pre-writing</b>


<b>-</b> T introduces the content of the text
about the recycling instructions.
<b>-</b> T asks Ss to read the text and find


newwords


<b>-</b> Guides Ss to read newwords


<b>-</b> Ss choose the word to complete
each blank



<b>-</b> Work in pairs (2’)


<b>-</b> Some Ss write on the extra board


<b> Lucky numbers</b>


1 2 3


4 5 6


7 8 9


* Lucky number: 1, 4, 5


<b>I. New words:</b>


<b>-</b> soak (n)
<b>-</b> dry (v)
<b>-</b> press (v)
<b>-</b> bucket (n)
<b>-</b> overnight (adv)
<b>-</b> mash (v)


<b>-</b> wire mesh (n)
<b>-</b> mixture (n)
<b>-</b> firmly (adv)


<b>II, Complete the recycling instruction</b>
<b>Use the verbs in the box.</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

<b>-</b> Some Ss read the text again
<b>-</b> T asks Ss to tell how to write the


instructions (each sentence begins
with a verb)


3, <b>While-writing</b>


<b>-</b> guides Ss how to write instructions
on how to prepare the tea leaves to
keep mosquitoes away.


<b>-</b> Explain some newwords


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to look at the picture, use
the words given to write sentences
- Work in pairs.


<b>-</b> Some Ss say sentence by sentence
<b>-</b> Some Ss write on the board.


- T corrects mistakes
4, <b>Post-writing</b>


- T gives suggestions and asks Ss to write
the instructions


5, <b>Homework</b>


(3) Place


(4) press
(5) wrap
(6) Wait
(7) dry.


<b>III,Make the instructions on how to </b>
<b>prepare the tea leaves.</b>


<b>-</b> scatter (v)
<b>-</b> tray (n)


a, first, take the used tea leaves from the
tea pot.


b, next, scatter the tea leaves on a tray
c, then, dry the leaves in the sun


d, finally, put the dry leaves in a pot for
future use.


+ break/ glass/ small pieces
+ wash/ the glass


+ melt/the glass/ a liquid


+ use pipe/ blow/ new glassware
- Learn by heart newwords


- Rewrite the instructions on how to
recycle the paper, tea leaves or the glass.


- Prepare Language focus


<b>Teaching date:8/2/2011</b>


<b>Period 64: </b>

<b>Unit 10 : RECYCLING</b>


<i>Lesson 5</i>

.

<b>Language focus</b>



<b>I, Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can use the passive voice of the simple present,
simple future; The structure: to be + adj +to-V...


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


*Vocabularies: detergent, specific, blow, dip, intended shape, relieved, scarf,
confirm.


*Grammar:- passive : + be + P.P
+ will + be + P.P
- adj + to-V/ that-clause


*Skills: writing, speaking.


<b>III, Teaching aids: </b>


Book, extra board...
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>

- Greetings



- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1,<b>Warm up</b>:
* Checking :


write the instruction to recycle the glass
2, <b>Presentation</b>


- Asks Ss to retell the use and the form of
the passive sentence


- Gives some examples and asks Ss to
give the structures


- asks Ss to make sentences with each
structure


3,<b>Practice</b>


- T guides Ss how to do exercise
- Explains some newwords
- Ss work in pairs


- Some Ss write on the board
- corrects mistakes


- Asks Ss to put the picture in correct


order


- Calls some Ss to show the picture and
say the instructions to recycle the glass
- T corrects mistakes


- Guides Ss how to do exercise
- Gives an example


- Ss work in pairs


- Some Ss write on the extra board
- Some Ss read their sentences
- Corrects mistakes


- T explains the structure: adj + to-V
- Asks Ss to read the dialogue and
choose the correct adj in the box to
complete the dialogue


- Some Ss read the dialogue in pairs
- Corrects mistakes


I, <b>Grammar</b>


<b>1. Passive forms of the present simple </b>
<b>tense</b>


Ex: They break the glass into small pieces
The glass is broken into small pieces


Active: <b>S + V/Vs/es + O + …</b>


Passive: <b>S(o) + is, am, are + P.P + …</b>


<b>2. Passive forms of the simple future </b>
<b>tense</b>


Ex: They will build a new school
A new school will be built
Active: <b>S + will + V + O + …</b>


Passive: <b>S(o) + will + be + PP + …</b>


EX1.


*Work with a partner.
<b>-</b> detergent (a)
<b>-</b> specific (a)
<b>-</b> dip (v)


<b>-</b> intended shape (n)


Ex: Break the glass into small pieces.
The glass is broken into small pieces.
b, The glass is washed with a detergent
liquid.


c, The glass pieces are dried comletely
d, They are mixed with certain specific
chemicals.



e, The mixture is melted until it becomes a
liquid


f, A long pipe is used. It is dipped into the
liquid.Then the liquid is blown into


intended shapes.


*Put the picture in the correct order.
a, - 1 b, - 4


c, - 3 d, - 5
e, - 2 f, - 6


EX2, Complete the dialogue.Use the
correct form of the verbs in brackets


(1) wil be shown
(2) will it be built
(3) will be finished
(4) will it be made.


EX3,Complete the dialogue.Use the words
in the box.


<b> S + be + adj + to-V + …</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>

- Asks Ss to read the letter in silence and


find newwords


- Guides Ss to choose adj in the box and
form of “to be” to complete the letter.


4,<b>Production</b>


- repeats the main knowledge in the
lesson


5, <b> Homework:</b>


d, dangerous to go
e, important to wait


EX4, Complete the letter.Use the correct
forms of the verb Be and the adj in the
box.


(1) was happy
(2) am relieved
(3) is afraid
(4) are … sure
(5) am certain.


- Learn by heart newword + passive forms
- redo exercises


Prepare for Unit 11



<b>Teaching date:10/2/2011</b>


<b>Period 65</b>: Unit 11 : TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM


<i>Lesson 1</i>

<i>.</i>

<b>Getting started + Listen and read</b>



<b>I, Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can read and understand the content of the dialogue
about traveling in Viet Nam


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


*Vocabularies: temple of literature, harbor, crop, corn, sugar can, take a photo.
*Grammar: Would you mind + Ving


Would you mind if + S + V(past)
I can see + O + Ving …..


*Skills: Listening, reading.


<b>III, Teaching aids: </b>


Book, tape, cassette, picture….
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance


<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1,<b>Warm up</b>


- T asks some questions :


+ What can you see in the first picture?
+ What’s this?


+ Have you ever been there?
+ Where is it?


- Can you tell me some famous places in
VN?


<b>-</b> Ss work in pairs to match the places of
interest with their names


<b>-</b> Some Ss stick the names on each
picture


<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes, and explains
newwords


2<b>, Presentation</b>


- T introduces about the content of the



I,<b>Getting started</b>


* Work with two classmates.Match the
places of interest in Viet Nam with their
names.


a, Ngo Mon Gate
b, Nha Rong Harbor


c, The Temple of Literature
d, Ha Long Bay


II, <b>Listen and read</b>
<b>1.New words:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

dialogue


- Ss read the dialogue in silence(1’)
- T asks some questions :


+ Who is talking in the conversation?
+ Where are they now ?


- Ss find newwords


- Guides Ss to read newwords
<b>-</b> T explains grammar
<b>-</b> Ss make sentences


- Guides Ss to make some sentenses



3,<b>Practice </b>


- Plays the tape, Ss listen and repeat
(twice)


<b>-</b> Ss work in groups (2’)


<b>-</b> Calls some groups to read again
<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes


<b>-</b> Asks some questions about the
content of the dialogue


+ Is this the first time Hoa has met Tim’s
family?


+ Does Hoa help Mrs Jones with her bags?
+ How is the Jone’s family going to HN
from the airport?


+ Has Shannon ever seen rice paddies
before? (etc)


- T guides Ss how to do exercise (explains
the difficult sentences)


- Ss work in pairs


- Some Ss give the results


- Corrects mistakes


4,<b>Production</b>


- Asks Ss to do exercise


- Call on some sts to write their results on
the board.


- T checks and gives the correct answers.


5,<b>Homework</b>


<b>-</b> mind (v)
<b>-</b> corn (n)
<b>-</b> sugar cane (n)
<b>-</b> take a photo (v)


* Grammar :


- Would you mind sitting in front seat?
<b>Would you mind +Ving….?</b>


- Would you mind if I took a photo ?
<b> Would you mind if I/we + V(past) ?</b>
<b>-</b> I can see a boy riding a water buffalo


<b>S + can see/ watch + O + Ving ….</b>
<b>2,Practice the dialogue in groups</b>



Yes, it is
Yes, she does
By taxi


No, she hasn’t


<b>3.True or false? Check the boxes. </b>
<b>Then correct the false sentences . </b>


a, T
b, T


c, F (in a taxi )
d, T


e, T


f, F ( sugar cane… )


* Write the correct form of the verbs
a, Would you mind (turn) on the TV?
b, Would you mind if I (sit) here?
c, Can you see the boy (read) the book
over there?


* Answers
a. turning
b. sat
c. reading



- learn by heart newwords + grammar
- read and translate the dialogue
- prepare Speaking


<b>Teaching date:12/2/2011</b>


<b>Period 66:</b>

<b>Unit 11 : TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM</b>


<i><b>Lesson 2.</b></i><b> </b>

<b>Speak + Language focus 3,4</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>

By the end of the lesson, Ss can make and respond to polite requests and
suggestions , using “mind”


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


* Vocabularies: vegetarian restaurant, revolutionary, zoo and botanical garden,
through.


* Grammar: Structures: - Do you mind …..?/ Would you mind ….?
* Skill: Speaking


<b>III, Teaching aids: </b>


Book, extra board,….
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance


<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1,<b>Warm up</b>


* Check the previous lesson
- Write newwords


- Corrects mistakes in the following
sentences


<b>2. Speak</b>


* <b> Pre-speaking</b>


<b>-</b> T explains how to make requests
and respond with “mind”


<b>-</b> Explains the differences between
the requests and offers they’ve
learnt.


- Asks Ss to make some sentences


*<b>While-speaking</b>


- Explains how to do exercises by
showing the example dialogue on the
extra board and guides Ss to replace the


words to make new dialogues


- Gives some newwords
- Guides Ss to read newwords
- Asks Ss to work in pairs


- some pairs of Ss speaking before class
- T corrects mistakes


*<b>Post-speaking</b>


<b>-</b> Some pairs of excellent Ss make
requests and suggestions using the
real situations


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to do exercise


<b>3. Language focus</b>


a, Would you mind open the window?
b, Would you mind if I open the window?


<b>I.Speaking</b>


1. Requests and responses with “Mind”
+ <b>Would you mind + Ving……</b>


<b> Do</b>


Ex:Do you mind giving me the book?


Would you mind giving me the book?
+ <b>Would you mind if + I + V(past)</b>


<b> Do We V(present)</b>
Ex: Would you mind if I rode your bike?
Do you mind if I ride your bike?
+ Yes, I don’t mind / Please do


Not at all / Please go ahead
+ I’m sorry, I can’t


I’m sorry, that is not possible
2.Newwords


<b>-</b> Vegetarian restaurant (n)
<b>-</b> Revolutionary (n)


<b>-</b> Through (prep)


<b>-</b> Zoo and Botannical garden (n)
3. Work with a partner


You: Would you mind if I asked you
a question?


Tourist: Not at all.


You: I want to visit Museum. Could you
suggest one ?



Tourist: Sure. I suggest going to the
Revolutionary Museum.


You: That sounds interesting.


Tourist: Would you mind telling me the
opening hours?


You: It opens from 8 a.m to 4.30 p.m
daily, except Monday.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

- Guides Ss how to do exercise 3 and
gives an example


- Asks Ss to work in pairs (2’)
- calls 3 Ss to write on the board
- the others work in pairs before class
- Corrects mistakes.


- Asks Ss to make sentences about
themselves


+) Asks Ss to look at the pictures and
make questions (replace Would you
mind + Ving ... by Would/ Do you mind
if I ...?)


<b>-</b> gives examples
<b>-</b> Work in pairs (2’)



<b>-</b> some Ss write on the board, the
others work in oral


<b>-</b> corrects mistakes
4. <b>Homework</b>


EX3, Use these words to make and
respond to requests.


Ex: a) move/ car


A: Would you mind moving your car?
B: No, of course not.


b, Would you mind putting out your
cigarette?/ No, of course not.


c,Would you mind getting me some
coffee? / I'm sorry. I'm too busy now.
EX4, Look at the pictures. Ask questions
and give suitable responses


Ex:a, A: Do you mind if I sit down?
B: Please do


b, A: Would you mind if I smoked?
B: I’d rather you didn’t.


c, Do you mind if I use your phone?/Not
at all.



d, Would you mind if I turned off the
stereo?/ I'd prefer you didn't.


e, Would you mind if I turned on the air
-conditioner?/ Please do.


f, Do you mind if I watch TV?/ I’m sorry,
that is not possible.


- learn by heart newwords + structures
- guides Ss to do exercises 3 (page 66-
workbook)


-prepare Listening.


<b>Teaching date:15/2/2011</b>


<b>Period 67:</b> Unit 11 : TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM


<i><b>Lesson 2</b></i>

<i><b>.</b></i>

<b> Listen + Language focus 1, 2</b>



<b>I, Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen and get informaion from
the tape in order to match the places to the correct positions on the map.


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


*Vocabularies: pagoda, starve, highway, direction, bridge



*Grammar:
*Skill: Listening.


<b>III, Teaching aids: Book, tape, cassette, mape...</b>


<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1,<b>Warm up</b>


* Checks the old lesson


<b>-</b> Two Ss make requests and
respond using structure: Would/
Do you mind…


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

* <b>Pre-listening</b>.<b> </b>


<b>-</b> T shows the map and asks Ss
some questions:


+ Where is place a?


+ Where is place c?


+ How can we get to place d? (etc)
<b>-</b> Asks Ss to read the words given
<b>-</b> T gives some newwords


<b>-</b> Practice the newwords


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to guess the places on the
map


* <b>While- listening</b>


- Listen all the dialogue once
<b>-</b> Plays the tape again (2- 3 times)
(T divides the dialogue into 4 parts)
<b>-</b> Ss listen and match


<b>-</b> Compare the answers with the
partners


<b>-</b> Some Ss write on the map


<b>-</b> Listen again and check the answers
<b>-</b> Corrects mistakes


*<b>Post </b>–<b>listening</b>


<b>-</b> Asks Ss some questions:
+ What is place a ?



+ Where is the bus station ?
- Then asks Ss to do an exercise


<b>-</b> Finally, asks Ss to show the map and
retell the position of each place (if
have time)


<b>3. Language focus</b>


- explains the title.


- T explains about ed/ing participle.
- Asks Ss to give the use of ed/ing
participles


- gives some examples


-Asks Ss to give the verb of each action
in the picture.


- work in pairs (2’)


<b>I. Listening :</b>


<i><b>1. Newwords:</b></i>
<b>-</b> pogoda (n)
<b>-</b> highway (n)



<b>-</b> starve (v) = hungry (adj)
<b>-</b> bridge (n)


<b>-</b> direction (n)


<i><b>2. Listen and match the places in the </b></i>
<i><b>box to their correct positions on the map</b></i>
* <b>Answer keys</b>


a, restaurant
b, hotel
c, bus station
d, pagoda
e, temple


* Exercise : Tick T or F


a, The hotel is on Da Lat Street. (F)
b, The restaurant is in the opposite the
direction from the pagoda (T)


c, The bus station is beside the hotel (F)
d, The old temple and the pagoda are on
the same road (T).


<b>II. Language focus</b>


EX1, Look at the people in the
schoolyard at Quang Trung school. Say
who each person is.



*Note: -ED and ING participles are used
to combine sentences


- ING participles: diễn tả sự việc đang
xảy ra.


- ED participles: diễn tả nghĩa bị động
Ex1:The boy is in class 8A. He is reading


a book.


→ The boy reading a book is in my class.
Ex2: There are many books. They are


written in English.


- There are many books written in
English


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

- Some Ss write sentences on the board
- The others read their sentences
- Corrects mistakes


- Guides Ss how to do exercise (Match
the verbs in the box with each thing in
the picture). Then gives examples.


- work in pairs (2’)



- Some Ss write down on the board.
- Correct mistakes


* Production


- Asks Ss to do exercise


- repeats some main knowledge to
prepare for the coming test


5, <b>Homework</b>


b,The woman talking to Nam is Miss
Lien


c,The girl playing chess with Nga is Hoa.
EX2. Describe the goods for sale.


Ex: The drunk painted green is one
dollar.


- The truck recyled from the junk is two
dollars.


- The doll dressed in pink dress is $2
- The toy kept in the tray are 10 dollars
* Exercise: Write the correct form of the
verbs


+ The student(buy) that book is in class 8


+ Would you mind if I (smoke)?


+ The test (write) in English is mine.
+ Do you mind (open) the door?


<b>-</b> Learn by heart newwords


<b>-</b> Write the position of each place on the
map


<b>-</b> Guides Ss to prepare “Read”


<b>Teaching date:17/2/2011</b>


<b>Period 68:</b>

<b>Unit 11 : TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM</b>



<i><b>Lesson 2.</b></i><b> </b>

<b>Read</b>





<b>I, Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can read and understand the content of the
text about the famous resorts in VN


<b>II./. Language content:</b>
* Vocabularies:


Oceanic Institute, giant Buddha, offshore island, accommodation, Eternal,
waterfall, tribal, mountain slope, jungle stream, heritage site, magnificent,


limestone


* Grammar:


* Skill: reading comprehension


<b>III, Teaching aids: </b>


Book, extra board,...
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1,<b>Warm up</b>


<b>-</b> asks Ss some questions:


+ Do you enjoy traveling around Viet
Nam? Can you tell me some famous
places in Viet Nam?


+ Do you know where Ha Long Bay is?
+ What is interesting in Nha Trang/ SaPa/
Da Lat?


2, <b> Pre-reading</b>



<b>-</b> T introduces the content of the lesson.
<b>-</b> Asks Ss to read the brochures quickly


and find newwords


<b>-</b> Guides Ss how to read the newwords


3,<b>While- reading</b>


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to read the brochures in
silence


<b>-</b> Guides Ss how to do exercise
<b>-</b> Work in pairs (3’)


- Some Ss check on the extra board
- T corrects mistakes


- Guides Ss how to do exercise


-Asks Ss to read the sentences from a) to
e) and read the text again in order to check
the boxes


-Work in pairs (2’)


- Asks Ss to give the answers (Where
should Andrew/ Mary go?)


- Corrects mistakes


4, <b>Post </b>–<b> reading</b>


<b>-</b> Asks Ss some questions:
+ Why should Andrew go to Sa Pa?
Mary Nha Trang?
5, <b>Homework</b>


<b>I. Newwords:</b>


<b>-</b> oceanic institute (n)
<b>-</b> giant Buddha (n)
<b>-</b> offshore island (n)
<b>-</b> eternal (a)


<b>-</b> accommodation (n)
<b>-</b> tribal (a)


<b>-</b> mountain slope (n)
<b>-</b> jungle stream (n)
<b>-</b> recognize (v)
<b>-</b> heritage (n)


<b>-</b> magnificent cave (n)
<b>-</b> limestone (n)


<b>II, Read about the reorts and check </b>
<b>the topics mentioned in the brochures </b>
<b>about the resorts </b>


<b>III. Read and answer. Where should </b>


<b>these people go? </b>


a, SaPa
b, Nha Trang


c, Nha Rong Harbor
d, Nha Trang


e, Da Lat


- Andrew should go to SaPa because
there are tribal villages there. (etc)


<b>-</b> learn by heart newwords


<b>-</b> Write the beautiful sights in SaPa,
Nha Trang, Da Lat, Ha Long Bay
<b>-</b> Prepare for Writing


<b>Teaching date: 19/2/2011</b>
<b>Period 69:</b>



<b>Unit 11 : TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM</b>


<i><b>Lesson 2.</b></i><b> </b>

<b>Write</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

By the end of the lesson, Ss can write a short passage in order to report
the past story


<b>II./. Language content:</b>



- Vocab: adventure, paddle, canoe, hire, overturn, stumble, realize, strange, rescue,
lean, go off, rock.


- Grammar: Review simple past tense
- Skill: writing.


<b>III, Teaching aids: </b>


Book, chalk...
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1. <b>Warm up</b>.


- Write the famous sights in Nha Trang,
Da Lat, SaPa, Ha Long Bay.


2. <b>Pre-writing</b>.


- Explains some newwords
- Guides Ss to read new words


- Asks Ss to say the tense which is used


in the story


- Asks Ss to read the first part of the
story (2') answer some questions:


+ Where did the Browns go last week?
+ What was the weather like?


- Guides Ss how to put the sentences
- Work in pair (2')


- Ss give the result
- Corrects mistakes


- Some S s read the story again.


- Asks Ss to look at the pictures and put
the events in the correct order.


- Guides Ss how to write sentences using
the words given


- Explains some newwords
3. <b>While - writing</b>


- Work in pair (5')


- calls one by one to write the sentence
on the board



- Corrects mistakes


<b>I. New words:</b>


- paddle (v) chèo thuyền (n) mái chèo
- canoe (n) ca nô


- hire (v) thuª
- rescue (v) cøu


- lean over (v) nghiªng ngêi.
- overturn (v) lËt óp.


<b>II.Read the story and put the sentences in</b>
<b>the correct order to complete the story</b>


<i><b>* Correct order</b></i>
1- c 5 - f
2 - a 6 - b
3 - g 7 - e
4 - d


<b>III. Put the events below in the correct</b>
<b>order and write the story.</b>


<b>Answers:</b>


1- d 3 - e 5 - a 7 - c
2 - b 4 - h 6 – f 8 - g
- stumble (v)



<b>-</b> rock (n)
<b>-</b> go off (v)
<b>-</b> realize (v)


1. She had a math exam on Friday and she
got up late.


2, She realiezed her alarm clock didn’t go
off.


3. As she was leaving home, it started to
rain heavily.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

4, <b>Post-writing</b>.


- repeats how to write the events which
happened in the past


5. <b>Home work</b>:


5. Suddenly,she stumbled a rock and fell.
6. Her school bag dropped into a pool and
everything got wet.


7. Strangely, the rain stopped as she got to
her classroom.


8. Luckily, Uyen had enough time to finish
her exam.



- Learn by heart New words.
- Write the story again.


<b>Teaching date:22/2/2011</b>


<b>Period 70:</b> Ôn tập, củng cố
<b>I, Objectives :</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss can review the language focus
<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocab: first aids, how to protect the envirnment
- Grammar: - Requests


- Passive and active forms
- Ing/ed participles


- Skills : Speaking - Writing


<b>III, Teaching aids : </b>


Book, chalk, picture, poster.
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance


<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>Activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>1. Requests</b>


<b>-</b> Ss read the requests, offers,
promises in the box


<b>-</b> T explains them and guides how
to use




<b> 1. Requests with can, could, would, </b>“


<b>will</b>”


- Can/ Could you + V
-Will/Would you + V


<b>* Offers:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>

<b>-</b> Some Ss make requests or offers
or promises and the others
respond


<b>-</b> T explains how to make requests
and respond with “mind”


<b>-</b> Explains the differences between


the requests and offers they’ve
learnt.


- Asks Ss to make some sentences


<b>2. Passsive and active forms</b>


<b>-</b> Asks Ss to retell the use and the
form of the passive sentence
<b>-</b> Gives some examples and asks Ss


to give the structures


-Asks Ss to make sentences with each
structure?


<b>3. ING / ED Participles</b>


- T explain about ed/ing participle.
- gives some examples




- Asks Ss to give the use of ed/ing
participles


-Asks Ss to give the verb of each action
in the picture.


- Would you like me + toV…



<b>* Promises:</b>


- I promise. I will + V
- I promise I won’t
- I promise + to V


<b>* Respond</b>


Sure/ OK ……
I’m sorry, I can’t
Yes, please.
No, thank you
I hope so/ Good
I’m glad


Don’t forget


* Work with a partner. Make and respond
to requests and offers or promises





<b>2. Requests and responses with </b>


+ <b>Would you mind + Ving……</b>
<b> Do</b>


Ex:Do you mind giving me the book?


Would you mind giving me the book?
+ <b>Would you mind if + I + V(past)</b>


<b> Do We V(present)</b>
Ex: Would you mind if I rode your bike?
Do you mind if I ride your bike?
+ Yes, I don’t mind / Please do


Not at all / Please go ahead
+ I’m sorry, I can’t


I’m sorry, that is not possible


<b>1. Passive forms of the present simple </b>
<b>tense</b>


Ex: They break the glass into small pieces
The glass is broken into small pieces
Active: <b>S + V/Vs/es + O + </b>…


Passive: <b>S(o) + is, am, are + P.P +</b> …
<b>2. Passive forms of the simple future </b>
<b>tense</b>


Ex: They will build a new school
A new school will be built
Active: <b>S + will + V + O + …</b>


Passive: <b>S(o) + will + be + PP + …</b>



1, Look at the people in the schoolyard at
Quang Trung school. Say who each
person is.


Ex1:The boy is in class 8A. He is reading


a book.


→ The boy reading a book is in my class.
Ex2: There are many books. They are


written in English.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>

- ING participles: diễn tả sự việc đang
xảy ra.


- ED participles: diễn tả nghĩa bị động


<b>Teaching date:24/2/2011</b>


<b>Period 71:</b> kiÓm tra mét tiÕt


I,<b>Objectives</b>


– Check the following knowledge
+ The simple tenses


- Grammar: - Requests


- Passive and active forms


- Ing/ed participles


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


<b>I/ pick out the words that has the underline parts pronunced differently.</b>
1. a. seat b. great c. seaside d. beach


2. a. sights b. flights c. villages d. tribes
3. A. returned B. recycled C. cleaned D. washed
4. a. waterfall b. canoe c. sugar d. island
5. a. railway b. daily c. airport d. train
<b>II/ Choose the best answer:</b>


6.If you have a burn, ease pain with…………water packs.


A.ice or cold B.hot C. warm D.tea


7.I took care……….their children for a week


A. of B. at C. with D. about


8.Perhaps she went to another store………….get better milk of lower price.
A. so as B. in order to C. in order that D. so as that


9.Cool the burn immediately…………minimize tissue damage.
A.in order B. order to C. as so to D. so as to
10. We should use cloth bags instead……….plastic bags.


A.at B. in C. of D. for



11. There are many magnificent caves in ……….


A. Nha Trang B. Sapa C. Da lat D. Ha long bay


12. It is not difficult ……….those.


A. remember B. to remember C. remembers D. remembered
13. I’m pleased…………to know more.


A.you that B.you want that C. you that want D. that you want
14. Compost is a wonderful natural……….


A.fertilize B. fertilizing C.fertilizer D. fertilizers
15. That beautiful toy……….from recycled paper.


A. is made B. making C.are made D.makes


16.The bottles are……… into small pieces.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>

17. The empty bottles are cleaned and……….


A. refills B. refilled C. refill D. refilling
18.The glass………into small pieces.


A. broken B. is broken C. broke D. break


19.It is difficult ………your directions .


A. follow B. following C. to follow D. follows



20.Stop, Tuan! It’s…………..to go near the stove .


A. danger B.dangering C.dangerously D. dangerous


21.We are looking forward to…………you in June .


A. seeing B. see C. saw D. seen


22. Are you arriving………..Saturday 20th<sub>?</sub>


A. on B. in C. at D. by


23.I can see a boy………..a water-buffalo


A. ride B. rides C. rode D. riding


24. I’m delighted ………passed your final exam .


A. you that B. that you C. that D. that I


25. Would you mind if I ………..you some questions ?


A. asks B. asked C. asking D. to ask


<b>III/ Rewrite sentences so that the meaning stay the same </b>
26. We must pay the bill at once.


-> The bill ………
27. Many people in the world speak English.



-> English………
28. This question is difficunt to understand.


-> It's………
29. I will repair your bicycle tomorrow afternoon.


-> Your bicycle ………..
30. " Don't throw things away," Miss Linda said to students.


-> Miss Linda asked ………
<b>IV/ Read the passage and answer the questions below.</b>


In Britain, the milkman brings bottles of milk to houses and collects the empty
ones. The empty bottles are then cleaned and refilled. Every milk bottle can be reused
thirty times.


Every year all over the world, people throw away billions of cans. In Oregon, the
government made a new law that there must be a deposit on all drink cans. The deposit is
returned when people bring the cans back for recycling.


<b>Điền đúng (T) hay sai (F) vào chỗ trống</b>


31, The milkman in Britain brings bottles of milk to houses and doesn’t collect
…………


the empty ones.


32, Then the empty bottles are cleaned and refilled.
…………



33, Every milk bottle can be reused thirty times.
…………


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

35, In Oregon, when people bring cans back for recycling, the deposit is
…………


returned.


<b>V/ Correct the forms of the verbs </b>


36. Would you mind (turn) ... on the TV?
37. Would you mind if I (close) ... the window?
38. Can you (wait) ... for me a moment?


39. He suggested( travel) …………around the town by bike.
40. Do you mind if I (use) ... your computer?


<b>Teaching date:26/2/2011</b>


<b>Period 72 :</b> Chữa bài kiểm tra một tiết


I,<b>Objectives</b>


– Check and review the following knowledge
+ The simple tenses


- Grammar: - Requests


- Passive and active forms
- Ing/ed participles



<b>II. Procedure:</b>


<b>Tổng điểm: 10 (Mỗi câu đúng cho 0,25đ)</b>


<b>I. </b> 1. B 2.C 3.D 4. A 5. C
<b>II. </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>

11. D 12. B 13. D 14. C 15. A


16. C 17. B 18. B 19. C 20. D


21. A 22. A 23.D 24. B 25. B


<b>III/ </b>


26. -> The bill must be paid at once.


27. -> English is spoken by many people in the world.
28. -> It's difficult to understand this question


29. -> Your bicycle will be repaired tomorrow afternoon.
30. -> Miss Linda asked the students not to throw things away
<b>IV.</b>


31. F 32. T 33.T 34. F 35. T


<b>V. </b>


36. turning


37. closed
38. wait
39. traveling
40. use


<b>Date of teaching: 01/3/2011</b>


<b>Period 73 :</b>


<b>Unit 12 : A vacation abroad</b>


<i><b>Lesson 1.</b></i><b> Getting started + Listen and read</b>


I, <b>Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson,Ss can understand the content of the dialogue about
making a plan, giving an invitation and responses


<b>II./. Language content:</b>


- Vocab: surprise, tour, include, business meeting.
- Grammar: always in present progressive tense.
- Skills: listening - reading and writing.


<b>III, Teaching aids</b>: book, chalk, tape, cassette, extra board.
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance


<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>T s and Ss Activities</b>’ ’ <b>Content</b>


1, <b>Warm up</b>.


- Asks Ss to look at the flags and match
the names oof the countries with


I, <b>Getting started.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

appropriate flags
- Correct mistakes.


- Read again all the names of the
countries.


- Guides Ss to do exercise
- T gives example


- Work in pairs (T asks or gives some
cues: Canada: has a lot of beautiful
sights; Britain: has many famous
buidings; Japan: has many kinds of
delicious food))


- Some pairs ask and answer
2, <b>Presentation:</b>


- T introduces the situation of the


dialogue.


- Asks Ss to guess what Mrs Quyen will
tell with Mrs Smith.


- Listen to the tape and find new words.
- guides Ss to read newwords


<b>-</b> T explains how to use “always” in
progressive tense.


<b>-</b> asks Ss to make some sentences
3, <b> Practice</b>:<b> </b>


<b>-</b> Listen and read after the tape
<b>-</b> work in pairs (2’)


<b>-</b> Some pairs read again.


+)Asks Ss to read the dialogue again and
do exercise 1


<b>-</b> work in pairs (2’)


- One Ss writes on the extra board.
- Corrects mistakes.


+) Read the dialogue again and answer
the questions given



<b>-</b> work in pairs


<b>-</b> some pairs ask and answer


<b>-</b> some write the answers on the
board


<b>-</b> corrects mistakes
4, <b>Production:</b>


<b>- </b>asks some good Ss to summarize Mrs
Quyen’s tour


5, <b> Homework</b>:<b> </b>


a, The United States of America.
b, Australia.


c, Thailand.
d, Britain.
e, Canada.
f, Japan.


2, Tell your partner which country you
like to visit and why?


Ex:


A:Which country do you want to visit?
B: I'd like to visit Thailand.



A: Why?


B: Because there are many old and
beautiful pagodas.


II, <b>Listen and read.</b>


<i><b>1. New words:</b></i>


- surprise (n) - surprising (adj)
- tour (n)


- include (v)


- business meeting (n)
Ex: He's always working.


→ Always với thì tiếp diễn để diễn tả sự
kiện thờng xảy ra với sự khơng hài lịng
hay than phiền.


2, <b>Complete Mrs Quyen s schedule</b>’ .
Tuesday 26: Going out.


Wednesday 27: Having dinner with the
Smiths.


Thursday 28: Leaving San Francisco.



3, <b>Answer the questions</b>.


a, No, they won't. Because they are
coming on a tuor and their
accommodation is included in the ticket
price.


b, No, he won't. Because he'll have a
business meeting.


c, Mrs Smith will pick her up at her
hotel.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

<b>Date of teaching: 03/3/2011</b>


<b>Period 74 :</b>


<b> UNIT 12: A VACATION ABROAD</b>



<i><b>Lesson 2. </b></i><b>SPEAK & LISTEN</b>
<b>I. Objectives : </b>


- By the end of the lesson, students will be about to talk about their plans for a
trip abroad .


- Practice in listening to the weather forecast for information about the weather
in big cities in the world .


<b>II. Language contents:</b>



1. Grammar: Present/Future simple tense (review)


2. Vocabulary: itinerary, gallery, flight, via, facilities, brochure.
<b>III. Teaching aids:</b>


Pictures, tape , transparency , flash cards …
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


1. Warm up


-T asks Ss to play game
-Ss give feedback


-T corrects


2. Pre-speaking
-T presents new words


-T uses the situations, explanation,


I. SPEAK:



_Network of places to visit .


Places to visit


Thai Land USA Canada
<b>1. New words:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

realia to explain the meaning
-Ss copy down


- Checking technique slap the board
3. While- speaking


-T asks Ss to read in chorus(2roles )
and then change the role


-Ss work in pairs
-T corrects


-T gives Ss a form of itinerary
T asks Ss to work in pairs
( interview )


- Ss give feedback
- T corrects


4. Post-speaking


- Ss report their partners ‘s itinerary
- T checks by asking ss.



*EX : Is that right?


<i><b>*Pre-listening:</b></i>
<i>Brainstorm : </i>


-T write the topic on the board
-Ask Ss to find the words related
to the topic. Collect Ss words and
write them on the board


- Go through the meaning of the
words and have Ss copy


-gallery ( n ) : phòng nghệ thuật
- via ( pre ) : through a place
- facility ( n )


- brochure (n):
<i><b>2. Practice:</b></i>


A: Where shall we stay ?


B : The Revere Hotel is expensive but it has
a gym


A: What time should we leave Los Angeles ?
B : There ‘s a daily flight at 10 a.m . Would
that be OK ?



What time / leave /Los Angeles ?
When / arrive / Boston ?


Where / stay ?
What / do /there ?
Their itinerary .


Depart Los Angeles : Flight 835 at 10 on
Monday


Arrive Boston : at 4.00


Accommodation : Atlantic Hotel .


Sightseeing : Boston University , Museum &
Art galleries .


Depart Boston : Flight 710 at 10.00 on
Thursday , 22


<b>II. LISTEN:</b>


hot wet
degree


Words related to


the weather forecast cool


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

<i><b>Chatting :</b></i>



-T asks Ss some questions to lead in
the lesson


-T asks the questions
- Ss answer the questions
- T gives marks


<i><b>*While – listening </b></i>


-T put the gap fill table on the board
- T uses the cassette


- Ss listen to the tape twice
-Ss complete the box
- T corrects if necessary
- Ss compare their answers
- T corrects if necessary


*Post-listening


Answer some questions about
weather and temperature


-Ss work in pairs


-Ss answer the questions
-T give feedback


<b>5. Homework:</b>



1. Have you ever listened to the weather
forecast on TV or on the radio ?


2. What does it often tell you about ?
( weather & temperature )


3. Do you think it’s necessary to listen to the
weather forecast ? Why / Why not ?


4. What do you know about the high and the
low temperature ?


( It refers to the lowest and highest
temperature degrees in a day )


<i><b>*Listen and complete the table:</b></i>


Temperature


<b>city</b> <b>weather</b> <b>low</b> <b>high</b>


Sydney Dry, windy <b>20</b> 26


Tokyo <b>Dry, windy</b> 15 <b>22</b>


London <b>Humid</b> <b> ,</b>


cold



<b>-3</b> <b>7</b>


Bangkok <b>Warm ,dry 24</b> <b>32</b>


New
York


<b>Windy,</b>
<b>cloudy</b>


<b>8</b> <b>15</b>


Paris <b>Cool ,dry</b> 10 <b>16</b>


.Answer some questions about weather
<b>and temperature </b>


A. What ‘s the weather like in Sydney
today ?


B. It will be dry and windy
A . How about the temperature ?


B. The low will be 20 and the high 26
degrees.


- Write – it- up :


Use the information in the table to write a
weather report , beginning with .



“ Here is today ‘s weather forecast for the
international travelers ”.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

- Prepare Unit 12: Read
<b>Date of teaching: 05/3/2011</b>


<b>Period 75 :</b>


<b>UNIT 12: A VACATION ABROAD</b>



<i><b>Lesson 3</b></i>. READ
<b>I. Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss can obtain some knowledge about some scenic sports
in the USA .


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


1. Grammar: past progressive tense with when, while


2. Vocabulary: volcano, lave, pour out, care, be situated, overhead .
<b>III. Teaching aids:</b>


Textbook, pictures,
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings



- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


Teacher’s and Students’ activities <b>Content </b>
<b>1. Warm up</b>


- T presents 11 cardboards numbered
from 1 to 11 on one side and the words
on the other side


- T explains how to play


- T asks Ss to play game “pelmanism ”
- Ss match in sequence of an adj with a
noun


- T gives mark
<b>2. Pre-Reading </b>


-T presents new words
-Ss copy down


- checking technique “ rub out and
remember ”


- T gives the patterns.


<b>3. While-reading : </b>


<i><b>Pelmanism :</b></i>



Adjectives Nouns .
Humid humidity
Warm warmth
Windy wind
Dry dryness
Cloudy cloud
Coolness


<i><b>I. New words:</b></i>


Volcano ( n ) ( drawing )
Lava ( n ) ( drawing )
Pour out ( v ) ( picture )


Carve ( v ) (mine / explanation )
Be situated ( translation )


Overhead ( adv ) above your head
Wharf (n)


Prison (n)


<b>* The past progressive tense:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>

- T draws the grid on the board


- T asks Ss to copy the gird in their
notebooks (1/117)



-T asks Ss to read the postcard from
Mrs. Quyen to her children and fill in
the gaps with the information taken
from them .


- T asks Ss to work in pairs


-T calls on some Ss to go to the board &
write the information in the grid on the
board


- Ss give feedback
- T corrects if necessary
<b>4. Post-reading : </b>


- T asks Ss to look at the questions on
page upload.123doc.net & to compare
their answers with their partner


- Ss work in pairs


- T calls on some & give feedback
-T corrects if necessary


-T gives mark


<b>5.</b>


<b> Homework </b>



<i><b>II. Complete the table:</b></i>


Place What she did and saw
a. Hawaii


b New
York
c. Chicago
d. Mount
Rushmore
e.


Francisco


- Went summing, visited
Kilauea volcano


- went shopping, bought
lots of souvenir


-saw late Michigan


- saw the heads of 4
American Presidents
- visited Fisherman’s
wharf the Na pa valley
wine growing area and
the Alcatraz Prison


<i><b>III, Answer the questions:</b></i>


<i>Answer key:</i>


a. She went there by plane


b. She saw the famous prison on the
Island of Alcatraz .


c. It is the mount where the heads of four
American Presidents are carved into the
rock, and it can be seen from more than
100 km away


d. It is also called “ the windy city ”
e. She went shopping


- Learn by heart new words .
- Write the answers into your
notebooks


- Do the exercises in the workbook
(page3 / 71 ,4/72)


- Prepare: write +15’test


<b>Date of teaching: 08/3/2011</b>


<b>Period 76 :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

<i><b>Lesson 4. </b></i><b>READ</b>
<b>I. Objectives : </b>



By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a postcard about vacation.
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


1. Grammar: simple past tense, present continuous tenses, adjectives (review)
2. Vocabulary: complain, heaviness, hospitable


<b>III. Teaching aids:</b>


Picture , transparency , flashcards .
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content </b>
<b>1. Warm up :</b>


- T asks Sts some questions.
- Ss give feedback.


- T corrects if necessary.


<b>2. Pre-Writing : </b>
- T presents new words


- Ss copy down



- Checking technique “ rub out &
remember ”


-T shows a postcard written by
Quyen to Sally and asks Ss to
complete Quyen’s postcard.


-Ss read the postcard and fill in the
missing words (work arrangement:
individual pair – compare )


- T gives feedback.


- T asks Ss to read the complete


<b>Network of places to visit , things to </b>
<b>buy .</b>


<b> Zoo </b>
Places to visit


<b> things to buy</b>


postcard
<i><b>I. New words:</b></i>
-Complain (v)
- heaviness (n)
- hospitable (adj)



 What did Quyen send to her children ?


 Postcard.


<i><b>II.Complete the postcard Mrs. Quyen sent</b></i>
<i><b>from the USA. (p118) </b></i>


1. in 6. lovely / nice
2.people 7. bought
3 .weather 8. for


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

postcard


- T corrects if necessary
<b>3. While-Writing:</b>
-T gives instructions


- T gives an example for the first.
- T asks Ss to write your postcard.


<b>*Post –writing:</b>


<b>-T calls on some Ss to the front of the</b>
class and ask them to read their
postcards to the whole class.


-Ss give feedback .
-T corrects if necessary
<b>5. Homework: </b>



<b>III. Imagine you are a tourist on vacation</b>
<i><b>in a certain place/city in Vietnam. Write a</b></i>
<i><b>postcard to a friend about your trip. You</b></i>
<i><b>need to cover the information about place,</b></i>
<i><b>weather,… (p.upload.123doc.net)</b></i>


Place : I am having… in …
<i>Example: </i>


Dear…,


We’re having a wonderful time in Ha Noi,
the capital of Vietnam .The people are
hospitable and helpful and the weather has
been wonderful : cool and sunny.


In Hanoi. I visited some of my old friends,
Tom and Sally. It was very nice to see
them.


We visited the History Museum and some
art galleries in Hang Bai street and had
lunch together at a vegetarian restaurant .
I bought a lot of souvenirs and postcards for
you and other friends .


See you soon.
With love,
Lan



<i><b>Exhibition your postcards</b></i>


Write your postcard in your notebook .
Do the exercise in the workbook page 75
Prepare language focus


<b>Date of teaching: 10/3/2011</b>


<b>Period 77 :</b>


<b>UNIT 12: A VACATION ABROAD</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


Students will be able to use the past progressive tense, progressive tenses
with always.


<b>II. Language content:</b>


1. Grammar: - Past progressive tense (review)


- Present progressive tense with always
2. Vocabulary: (review)


<b>III. Teaching aids: </b>
Text books
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings



- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


- T introduces the past progressive
tense.


- Ss copy.


- T has Ss say each person was doing
at 8 last night.


- Ss write the sentences and read to the
rest of the class.


- T corrects if necessary.


- T gives examples.
- Ss copy.


- T has Ss work in groups to match the
sentences.


- Ss give the answer.
- T corrects if necessary.


<b>1. Past progressive tense:</b>



<i><b>Formation: S + were/ was + V-ing...</b></i>
Ex. Ba was taking a shower at 8 o’clock
last night.


<i>Look at the pictures. Say what each</i>
<i>person was doing at eight o’clock last</i>
<i>night.</i>


b. Hoa was having dinner at 8 last night.
c. Bao was doing his homework at 8 last
night.


d. Nga was writing a letter at 8 last night.
e. Na was walking at 8 last night.


f. Lan was talking to her grandma at 8 last
night.


<b>2. Past progressive with When and </b>
<i><b>While</b></i>


<i>Ex. The Le family was sleeping when the </i>
mailman came.


The mailman came while Hoa was eating.
<i>Look at the pictures. Then match the </i>
<i>half-sentences in column A to those in column</i>
<i>B. Write the fool sentences in your</i>
<i>sentences.</i>



b. F the phone rang.


c. E When Nam won the race, the crowd
was cheering.


d. B Mrs. Thoa was cooking when Tuan
arrived home.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

- T gives example and explains the
pattern.


- T has Ss write sentences.


- Ss write sentences. Then write on the
board.


- T corrects if necessary.


<b>*Consolidation:</b>


T reminds ss of the structures above
<b>5. Homework:</b>


f. A It’s was raining when the plane got to
Ha Noi.


<b>3. Present progressive with always </b>
<b>( complaint)</b>


<b>Ex. Bao is always forgetting his</b>


homework.


<i>Look at the pictures. Write the sentences.</i>
<i>Say what the people are always doing.</i>
b. Mrs. Nga is always losing her umbrella.
c. Mr. and Mrs. Thanh are always missing
the bus.


d. Nam is always watching TV.
e. Na is always talking on the phone.
f. Liem is always going out.


- Do the three exercises at home again.
- Prepare the next part: Unit 13: getting
started + Listen and read


<b>Date of teaching: 12/3/2011</b>


<b>Period 78 :</b>


<b>UNIT 13: FESTIVALS</b>



<i><b>Lesson</b></i> 1. GETTING STARTED & LISTEN AND READ
<b>I. Objectives:</b>


Ss will be able to ask for explanations of events
<b>II. Language contents</b>


1. Grammar: compound words



2. Vocabulary: (v) fetch, yell, urge, rub, participate, award


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>

<b>III. Teaching aids: </b>
cassette, pictures
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


<b>1. Warm up :</b>


-T. writes the names on the board


-Tell Ss these people are going to go
on their visits to Vietnam and they
need advice on where to go


-Introduce the names, one by one


<b>2. Presentation :</b>


-T. presents some new words


-Ss repeat and say the meaning



-Ss copy


-T. presents model sentence
-T. checks vocabulary




What and where
<b>3. Practice </b>


-T. set the scene: “Ba invites his
friend Liz to a traditional festival in
the North of Vietnam. Do you know
what kind of festival it is?


(It is the rice-cooking festival)


-T. asks Ss to guess what they are


<i><b> Chatting</b></i>


Tom, David, Huckleberry, Oliver,
Robinson


1/ Tom likes swimming and sunbathing
Where should he go? … Why? …
2/ David is interested in ancient cities<sub></sub>?
3/ Huckleberry likes mountain – climbing





?


4/ Oliver is keen on pottery<sub></sub> ?


5/ Robinson is fond of crowed places<sub></sub> ?
<i><b>I. Vocabulary:</b></i>


+fetch (v) : to go to get (sth) and bring it
+yell (v) : to shout loudly


+urge (v) : make a person / an animal move
more quickly


+rub (v)


+participate = to take part (in sth)




participation (n)
+award (v)


He is the winner of the competition. They
(award) him the first prize)




<b> Model sentences:</b>



There are three competitions:
water-fetching, fire-making and rice-cooking




Suggestions:


+How many competitions do people enter
in a rice-cooking festival?


+In water-fetching festival competition,
what do people do?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

going to read by asking questions
-Ss open their books, read the
dialogue and listen to the tape


-Ask Ss to read the statements and
check (<sub></sub>) the boxes, using the
information in the dialogue


-Ss work in pairs and correct the
false sentences


- Ss answer the questions.
<b>4. Consolidation: </b>


-T asks Ss some questions.
<b>5. Homework </b>



a. F <sub></sub> Only one team member takes part
in the water-fetching contest


b. F <sub></sub> One person has to collect one
water bottle


c. T


d. F <sub></sub> Pieces of bamboo are used to
make the fire


e. F <sub></sub> In the final contest, the judges
taste the rice


f. T


- What festival does Ba invite Liz to go to?
Rice-cooking festival.


- Learn new words, do exercises again
- Do exercise 3 in workbook


- Prepare: Speak + Listen


<b>Date of teaching: 15 /3/2011</b>


<b>Period 79 : </b>

<b>UNIT 13: FESTIVALS</b>



Lesson 2. SPEAK & LISTEN



<b>I. Objectives: </b>


Ss will be able to talk about their preparation for a special event and to listen for
details about the preparations for Tet.


<b>II. Language contents</b>


1. Grammar: Present perfect, present progressive (review)
2. Vocabulary: (n) Pomegranate, peach blossoms, Marigolds


Dried watermelon seeds, spring rolls
<b>III. Teaching aids:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


<b>1. Warm up :</b>




Find things in common


-T. asks Ss to think of 5 things they
often prepare for Tet



-Ss write them on the board


-T. remarks and gives marks to Ss


<b>2. Pre-Speaking:</b>
-T. presents vocabulary
-Ss repeat


-Ss join the game


-T asks Ss to read the dialogue on page
123 and put the sentences in correct
order


-Ss work in pairs


-Calls some pairs to give their answer


<b>3. While-speaking </b>


-T. puts the chart with the cues on the
board


-Elicit the exchanges from Ss
-Ss work in pairs


-T calls some pairs to practice each
exchange before going on to another
exchange



decorate the room/ yard buy cakes


Paint the house buy new dress
Send New Year cards to friends
<b>I. Vocabulary:</b>


+Pomegranate (n): quả lựu
+Peach blossoms (n) quả đào
+Marigolds (n) cúc vạn thọ
+Dried watermelon seed: hạt dưa
+Spring rolls (n) chả giò


-What and where
<b>II. Ordering</b>


<i><b>*Answer key:</b></i>
A <sub></sub> F D <sub></sub> J
B <sub></sub> G E <sub></sub> I
C <sub></sub> H


<b>III. Mapped dialogue</b>


Mrs. Quyen Lan


A: You/ tidied/
bedroom?


B: Market/ have to/
oranges/



pomegranates
C: Sure/ will


D: not really/ that/
want house/ look


1. Yes/ where/
going/


2. Could/ collect/
new Ao Dai
tailor/ corner/?
3. Thanks/
anything/ want/
me/ do/ while/
out/?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

-T asks Ss choose one of the festival
(page 123) and make up their own
dialogues


-Ss work in pairs


-Then T calls on some pairs to
demonstrate their dialogues before the
class


<i>-T set the scene</i>


<i>“The Robinson family is making</i>


<i>preparations for Tet. They want to buy</i>
<i>things to make it a traditional festival</i>
<i>as Vietnamese people do”</i>


-T asks Ss to open their books and read
the statements on page 124


-Ss predict the words in the gaps play
the tape (2 or 3 times)


-T corrects


-T asks Ss to copy the grid (page 124)
and fill in the gaps with the


information taken from the statements
above


-T calls on some Ss to give their
answers


-T corrects


<b>4. Consolidation:</b>


T reminds ss of Present perfect tense
and present progressive tense


<b>5. Homework:</b>



nice/ festival


E: That/ very good.
Bye


clean/ glass
windows
5. Bye/


<b> Make similar dialogues:</b>
a village festival


a school festival
a spring festival
a harvest festival
a flower festival


<b> Listening</b>


Gap-fill prediction
* Answer keys:


a. Mr. Robinson… Flower market
b. Traditional


c. Dried watermelon seeds


<i><b> * Things to do</b></i>


Mr. Robinson Go to the flower


market to buy peach
blossom and a bunch
of marigolds


Liz Go to the market to


buy candies and a
packet of dried
watermelon seeds
Mrs. Robinson Go to Mrs. Nga’s to


learn how to make
spring rolls


-Learn new words


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>



<b> </b>


<b>Date of teaching: 17/3/2011</b>


<b>Period 80 : </b>

<b>UNIT 13: FESTIVALS</b>



Lesson 3. READ


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to get some knowledge about Christmas
<b>II. Language contents:</b>



1. Grammar: simple past tense, present perfect tense
2. Vocabulary: (v) spread


(n) Christmas carol, patron saint
(adj) jolly


<b>III. Teaching aids:</b>


Pictures, cardboard, poster,
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

<b>1. Warm up:</b>


-T. teaches Ss an English Christmas
song


-Ask Ss to listen to the tape and sing
along


<b>2. Pre-reading:</b>


-T. presents new words
-Ss repeat and copy



-T. check vocabulary holding class
to play “Jumbled words”


<b>3. While-reading:</b>


-Ask Ss to open their books and read
the paragraphs on page 124/ 125
-T draws the grid on the board and
have Ss copy it


-T asks Ss to read the paragraph
again and complete the grid
-T gives feedback and corrects


<b>4. Post-reading:</b>


-T asks Ss to answer the questions
-Ss work in pairs


-T corrects and gives answers


Ex: Silent night, I wish you a merry
Christmas …


<b>I. Vocabulary</b>


+ spread (v) (to cover a larger and larger
area).





to spread  spread  spread


+ Christmas carol (n)


(Silent night is a Christmas carol)
+ patron saint (n)


+ jolly (adj) happy and cheerful




Jumbled words


a. d.


b. e.


c. f.


<i><b>*Answer key:</b></i>


a. Santa Claus d. spread


b. jolly e. decorate
c. carol f. patron saint
<b>II. Read the paragraph again and </b>
<b>complete the grid</b>


*Answer key


Christmas
specials


Place of
origin


Date
The Christmas


tree


Riga Early


1500s
The Christmas


Cards


England Mid -19th
century
The Christmas


Carol


No


information


800 years
ago



Santa Claus USA 1823


<i><b>*Answer key:</b></i>


a. More then two centuries ago


b. Because wanted to send Christmas
greetings to his friends


Tansa aucls pdsear
codraete
yljol


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>

T reminds ss of some knowledge
about Christmas


<b>5. Homework </b>


c. 800 years ago


d. An American professor named Clement
Clarke Moore


e. On the description of Saint Nicholas in
professor Moore’s poem


-Rewrite the answers in their notebooks
-Learn by heart the new words



-Write it up: Use the information in the grid
to write the brief paragraphs


-Prepare Unit 13: Write


<b>Date of teaching: 19/3/2011</b>


<b>Period 81 : </b>

<b>UNIT 13: FESTIVALS</b>



Lesson 4. WRITE
<b>I. Objectives:</b>


Ss practice in writing a report on a festival they have joined
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


1. Grammar: past simple and present simple
2. Vocabulary: related to festivals


<b>III. Teaching aids:</b>


picture (page 126), chart
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>



<b>1. Warm up:</b>




<b>Memory game</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>

Ss and ask them to observe it
carefully


-Let Ss look at the picture for about
20’’ then put it away


-T asks Ss to listen to the questions
-Ss answer


-T puts the picture on the board again
-Give feedback and correct


<b>2. Pre-writing:</b>


-Write 9 numbers on the board from 1
to 9


-Tells Ss each number is for a
question but 3 of them are lucky
numbers


-If Ss choose a lucky number, they
don’t have to answer any questions


-T divides the class into 2 teams and
holds the game


<b>3. While-writing </b>


-T asks Ss to use the information in
the dialogue on page 121 to fill in the
gaps in the report on page 127


-Ss work in pairs


-T corrects and remarks
<b>4. Post-writing</b>


-T asks Ss to write a similar report on
a festival they’ve joined recently
-Ss look at the questions and practice
speaking first by answering the


picture?


What are they doing?


2/ Name all the things in the picture
<b>*Answer key:</b>


1/ They are participating in the rice-cooking
competition


2/ Rice, basket, pans, bamboo sticks, paper


fans, chopsticks, a flag


<i><b> Lucky numbers</b></i>


1/ What do you call the festival where
people have to cook rice?


(The rice cooking festival)


2/ How many competitions are there in the
rice-cooking festival? What are they?
( 3/ water-fetching, fire-making and
rice-cooking)


3/ Lucky number


4/ What do people use to fetch water?
(bottles)


5/ Lucky number


6/ Do they use pieces of wood to make fire?
(No, pieces of bamboo)


7/ What do people have to do before they
cook the rice? (separate the rice from the
husk)


8/ Lucky number



9/ How many people are there altogether in
a team taking part in the rice-cooking
festival?


(9, one for water-fetching, two for
fire-making and six for rice-cooking)


<i>1. Use the information in the dialogue on</i>
<i>page 121 to fill in the gaps in this report</i>
<b>*Answer key:</b>


1/ rice-cooking 6/ traditional
2/ one/ a 7/ bamboo
3. water-fetching 8/ six
4/ run 9/ separate
5/ water 10/ added


<i>2. Write a similar report on a festival you</i>
<i>joined recently </i>




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>

questions from a  g


-T has Ss connect the sentences to
make it a report


-T monitors and helps Ss with their
work



-T calls on some Ss to read their
reports aloud


<b>5. Homework</b> -Write your report in your notebooks


-Prepare: Language Focus


<b>Date of teaching: 21 / 3 / 2011</b>


<b>Period 82 : </b>

<b>UNIT 13: FESTIVALS</b>



Lesson 5. LANGUAGE FOCUS


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


Ss will be able to use reported speech and the passive in the past, present
and future tense


<b>II. Language contents : </b>


1. Grammar: Passive form, reported speech
2. Vocabulary: (v) jumble, scatter, jar, pull
<b>III. Teaching aids: </b>


Cardboards, chart
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings



- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


<b>1. Warm up:</b>


-T prepares 11 cardboards, numbered
from 1 to 11 on one side and the
words on the other side


<i><b>1. Pelmanism</b></i>


Infinitive Past participle
Put


Write
Hold


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=149>

-T divides ss into 2 teams and ask
each team to choose 2 numbers, one
in the first row, if the words in both
cards match in sequence of an
infinitive with its past participle, this
team will get a point


<b>2. Presentation:</b>


-T asks Ss to match the words in
column A with the forms in column B


-Ss work in pairs


-T calls Ss to give their answers
-T corrects


-T has Ss copy


<b>3. Practice:</b>


-T asks Ss to look at language focus 1
on page 128


-T has Ss fill in the gaps with the
right form of the verbs in the box
-Ss work in pairs


-T calls on some Ss to write their
answers (only the verb forms)


-T corrects


-T presents new words


-Ss repeat and say the meaning


-T asks Ss to look at language focus 2
on page 128 and 129 and fill in the
gaps with the right form of the verbs
in the box



-Correcting


- T has Ss read the example and
suggest Ss how to do the exercise.
- Ss rewrite the sentences. Then give


Make
Break


Made
Broken


<i><b>2. Matching</b></i>


The passive form


A B


Tenses Form


1. Present
Simple


2. Past simple
3. Future simple
4. Present
perfect


a. was/ were + PP
b. have/ has been


+PP


c. Is/ am/ are + PP
d. will/ shall + be +
PP


<i><b>*Answer key:</b></i>


1. c 2. a 3. d 4.b
<i><b>Language focus 1</b></i>


<i><b>ØGap-fill</b></i>
*Answer key:


a. were performed
b. was decorated/ put
c. is made


d. will be held
e. was awarded
f. was written
<i><b>Language focus</b><b> 2</b><b> </b></i>
<i>*Vocabulary: </i>
+ jumble (v)


+ scatter (v) (to throw things everywhere
on the ground)


+ jar (n) (drawing/ realia)
+ pull (v)



—<i> Gap-fill</i>
*Answer key:


1. jumbled 4. scattered
2. broken 5. pull


3. broken


<i><b>Language focus 3 ( compound word)</b></i>
*Answer key:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=150>

the answer.


- T corrects if necessary.


-T asks Ss to look language focus 4
on page 130 and do the exercise


-Correcting


-Ss rewrite the sentences, remember
to keep the meaning unchanged


<b>4. Consolidation:</b>


-T reminds ss of the passive form,
compound words and reported speech
- Ask ss to report the sentences:



<b>5. Homework </b>


b. It’s a pull-fighting festival.
c. It’s a car-making industry.
d. It’s a flower-arranging contest.
e. It’s a rice-exporting country.
f. It’s a clothes-washing machine.
<i><b>Language focus 4</b></i>


— Transformation drill
*Answer key:


b. He said he could fix the faucets
c. He said the pipes were broken


d. He said new pipes were very expensive
e. He said Mrs. Thu had to pay him then


a. The children said, “We are waiting for
the school bus” " The children said …
b. Nobody has used this machine for years
" This machine …


c. The last time I played tennis was in 1990
" I haven’t …


-Learnt by heart the words, grammar


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=151>

<b>Date of teaching: 29 / 3 / 2011</b>



<b>Period 83 : </b>

<b>UNIT 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLD</b>



Lesson 1. GETTING STARTED & LISTEN AND READ
<b>I. Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to practice in reading to seek information
about a language game to complete a summary.


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


1. Grammar: - Passive forms, Present (revision), future.
- Indirect questions with “ if” and “ whether”
- Question words before to – Infinitive.
- Verb + to – Infinitive


2. Vocabulary: none
<b>III. Teaching aids:</b>


- Pictures of places of interest in the world,
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


<b>1. Warm up</b>



-T prepares some postcards or
pictures of the famous world


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=152>

landmarks or scene spots in Vietnam
-T shows the pictures, one by one, to
Ss and asks them what place it is
-T divides the class into 2 teams, the
team able to answer the question will
get 1 point.


-T gives Ss some suggestions to help
them easily recognize the place


<b>2. Pre-reading</b>


-T Informs the topic: wonders of the
world


-T has Ss look at the pictures on page
131 and do the matching


-T checks if they know where/ in
which country these wonders are
-T sets the scene:


<i>“Nga, Nhi and Hoa are playing a</i>
<i>language game called guessing</i>
<i>game. How does this game work?</i>
<i>Rearrange the statements in the right</i>


<i>order of the game”.</i>


-T puts the statements chart on the
board


-T asks Ss to read the statements and
put them in the right order.


<b>3. While-reading</b>


-T calls on some pairs to go to the
board and write their answers


-T asks Ss to open their books and
read the dialogue on page 131, 132
while listening to the tape/ play the
tape


-T checks if Ss’ guesses are right or
not


-T has Ss copy the statements in the
right order


- Ss practice the dialogue


-T has Ss read the dialogue again and
complete the summary (2) on page
132



-T has Ss to compare their answers
with their partners


-Elicit the target language by asking


It is a place in the Central Vietnam with
cold weather everyday of the year …


<b> I. Getting started</b>
*Answer key:
a/ The Pyramid


b/ Sydney Opera House
c/ Stone and Read
<b>II. Ordering</b>


<i><b> à How to play the guessing game</b></i>


1.B asks questions to find out who or what is
2.A thinks of a famous person or place


3. B wins if he/ she can guess the correct
answer


4. A give B a clue


5. B loses if he/ she can’t guess the correct
answer


6. A can only answer “yes” or “no”


<i><b>*Answer key:</b></i>


2. a think of .
4. .
1. .
6. .
3. .
5. .


<b>III. Gap fill</b>
*Answer key:


1. Game, 2. Place, 3. Clue, 4. Vietnam 5.
America, 6. Golden


7. Right, 8. Was
ØGrammar Awareness
<i><b>* Model sentences:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=153>

Ss a question


<b>4. Post reading:</b>


-T asks Ss to read the summary again
-Write the words on the board


-T asks Ss to match the words in
Column A with their explanations in
Column B



-T asks some Ss to give their answers
- T corrects


<b>5. Homework</b>


Form: S + V + question word + to –inf
Use: Reduced form of an indirect question.
Eg: I don’t know how I can play it


how to play it
<i><b>*Matching</b></i>


A B


1. Suggest
(v)


2. Golden
(adj)
3. Clue (n)
4. bored


a. a piece of information
that helps you discover the
answer to question


b. What you often feel
when you have nothing to
do



c. made of gold
d. make a suggestion
*Answer key:


1. d 2. c 3. a 4. b


-Learn model sentences by heart
-Do exercises in the workbook
-Prepare: Unit 14: Speak + Listen




<b>---Date of teaching: 31 / 3 / 2011</b>


<b>Period 84 : </b>

<b>UNIT 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLD</b>



<b>Lesson 2. SPEAK + LISTEN</b>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>


Ss will be able to make a report on famous places using reported speech
and recognize mistakes through listening to an advertisement


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


1. Grammar: Indirect questions with if and whether


2. Vocabulary: (adj) relaxing, crystal clear, (n) coral, (v) snorkel
<b>III. Teaching aids: </b>


Cassette, tape, pictures


<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=154>

- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


<b>1. Warm up</b>


-T informs the topic and time limit
-T has Ss write 10/15 famous world
places within 3 minutes


-T delivers poster to Ss


-T tells Ss to put their posters on the
board


-T gives feedback and corrects
<b>2. Pre-speaking:</b>


-T puts the chart with the statements
on the board


-T asks to read the statements and the
names of the famous places in the box
on page 133 and do matching



-T checks if Ss understand the
statements


-T calls on some pairs to give their
answers


-T give feedback and correct


<b>3. While-speaking:</b>


-T asks Ss to write yes/no questions
about 10 places in the box, using the
information in the matching


-T monitors and assist Ss if necessary
-T has Ss ask and answer the
questions, check yes or no


-T calls on a group to demonstrate


Who is the faster?


<b>I. Speaking:</b>


<i>1. Write yes/ No questions. Ask and answer.</i>
*Matching


1/ It was designed and built by the French
civil engineer with 300 meters in height


2/ It is in South Central Asia, 8.848 meters
high above sea level


3/ It was built from 246-209 BC and some
people say it can be seen from the moon
4/ It is a bell striking the hours in the clock
tower of the Houses of Parliament in London
5/ It is a skyscraper in Manhattan, New York
City


6/ It is a famous place in Quang Binh
Province recognize as a World Heritage by
Unessco


<i><b>Answer key:</b></i>
1/ Eiffel Tower
2/ Mount Everest
3/ Great Wall of China
4/ Big Ben


5/ Empire State building USA
6/ Phong Nha Cave


<b>Questions and answer drill</b>
Suggest:


1/ Have they just built the Eiffel Tower in
Paris?


2/ Is the Empire State building located in


New York City?


3/ Are the Petronas Twin Towers located in
Malaysia?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=155>

their work


-T sets the scene


Ask a student: (Lan/ …)


T: Is Hue Citadel in the Central
Vietnam


S: Yes, it is


-T. asks Ss to listen


T: I asked Lan if Hue Citadel was in
<i>the Central Vietnam. She said (that) it</i>
<i>was</i>


-T writes the statement on the board
-T choose a group’s answers to
demonstrate the model (asking and
reporting)


-T calls on a pair in a group to
demonstrate the exchanges and the tell
one of them to report.



-T has Ss work in their groups


-T calls on Ss in different groups to
report in front of the class


-T gives feedback and corrects
* Pre-listening:


-T presents the new word
-Ss listen


-Then Ss read the new words (choral,
individually)


-T sets the scene:


<i>“You are going to listen to an</i>
<i>advertisement on the tape. There are 4</i>
<i>mistakes in the advertisement in your</i>
<i>books”</i>


-T has Ss read the advertisement in
their books for a few minutes


-T asks Ss some questions about the
geographical names in the paragraph
-T plays the tape 2 or 3 times


-T gets some Ss to give their answer


-T plays the tape the last time, give
feedback and correct


<b>4. Homework:</b>


5/ Have you ever seen Mount Rushmore?
6/ Is Mount Everest in Nepal?...


<i>2. Talk about your classmates’ answers with</i>
<i>your partner.</i>




Grammar drill
Model sentences:


I said to Lan, “Is Hue Citadel in the
Central Vietnam?”
(Yes/ No questiondirect


speech)


I asked if Hue Citadel was in


Lan the Central Vietnam?”
Form: S + V + O + if/where + S + V …
* Ss’ answers.


<b>II. Listening:</b>



Listen and correct the mistakes.
ØNew words


relaxing (adj)
crystal clear(a)
coral (n)


snorkel (v)
*Answer key:


Look no further beautiful far north
Queensland. Stay right on the beach at the
Coconut Palm Hotel. Take guided tours
through the rainforest, swim in the
crystal-clear water of the Coral Sea and Snorkel
amongst the coral of the Great Barrier Reef
Marine Park - a world Heritage Site


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=156>

-Do exercises in workbook
-Prepare: Unit 14: Read


<b>Date of teaching: 2 / 4 / 2011</b>


<b>Period 85 : </b>

<b>UNIT 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLD</b>



<b>Lesson 3. READ</b>


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


Ss will be able to get some knowledge about the wonders of the world


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


1. Grammar: Past simple tense (review)


2.Vocabulary: (v) compile, claim, honor.(n) God, religion, (a) royal
<b>III. Teaching aids: </b>


Pictures
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


<b>1. Warm up</b>


Revision: Coral, crystal-clear,
snorkel, relaxing


-T draws dashes on the board, each
dash is for a letter of the world


-T has Ss guess the letters, one by
one


-For every wrong guess, draw a line


(from 1 to 8), Ss will lose the game if
they guess wrong 8 times


<b>2. Pre-reading</b>


-Elicit words from Ss
-Have Ss copy




Slap the board




<b> Hangman</b>
(C ) (O) (R) (A) (L)


1
2

3


5 6
4


7
8


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=157>

--T asks Ss to decide if the statements
are true or false



-T writes Ss’ guesses on the board


<b>3. While-reading</b>


-T asks Ss to read the text on page
134, to check their guesses


-T calls on some Ss to correct the
false statements


-T asks Ss to choose the best answers
to complete the sentences


-T puts the answers chart on the
board


-T/Ss Read the statements aloud and
make hand gestures to show the
missing words


-T asks Ss to choose A, B, C or D
-T corrects and has Ss write the right
answers in their notebooks


<b>4. Post-reading</b>


- T draws the grid on the board and
has Ss copy it



-T asks Ss to read the text again and
fill in the grid with the information
taken from the text


+ royal (a)


<i><b>II. True/ False prediction</b></i>


1. An Egyptian man compiled a list of what
he thought were the seven wonders of the
world


2. The only surviving wonder is The Pyramid
of Cheeps in Egypt


3. Today, we can still see the Hanging
Gardens of Babylon in present – day Iraq
4. Angkor Wat was originally built to honor a
Hindu God


5. The Great wall of China a first wasn’t in
the list of the 7 wonders of the world


6. In the early 15th<sub> century, the Khmer King</sub>
chose Angkor War as the new capital


<i><b> *Answer key:</b></i>


1. F  A Greek man named Antipater did it



2. T


3. F  The only surviving wonder is the


pyramid of Cheeps in Egypt
4. T


5. T


6. F  In the early 15th century, the Khmer King


chose Phnom Penh as the new capital
<i><b> Multiple choice</b></i>


Answer key:


a/ The only surviving wonder on Antipater’s
list is the Pyramid of Cheops


b/ Angkor Wat was originally built for
Hindus


c/ Angkor Wat was part of a royal Khmer city
a long time ago


d/ In the 1400s, the Khmer King chose
Phnom Penh as the new capital





Grid


Wonders of the
world


Country
1. Hanging gardens


of Babylon


2.
3.
4.
5.
6.


Iraq


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=158>

<b>5. Homework</b>


-Call on some Ss to give their answers
-Do the exercises in the workbook
-Prepare: UNIT 14: Write


<b>Date of teaching: 5 / 4 / 2011</b>


<b>Period 86 : </b>

<b>UNIT 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLD</b>



Lesson 4. WRITE



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


Ss can write a letter to a friend about a place they have visited
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


1. Grammar: Review Simple Present, Simple Past, Present Perfect tenses.
2. Vocabulary: (n) canyon, ranger, edge, (a) Breathtaking, temperate
<b>III.Teaching aids: </b>


- Pictures, worksheets.
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


<b>1. Warm up</b>


-T asks Ss to think of one of the
wonders of the world and write it on a
piece of paper


-T calls on a student to the front of the
class with his/ her paper


-T has the rest of the class ask him/ her


yes-no questions to guess the wonder
-The student having the right guess
will take the place of the last student
<b>2. Pre-writing</b>


-T elicits words from Ss
-T gets Ss to copy


-T has Ss play the game
<b>3. While-writing</b>


-T asks Ss to read the letter Tim sent to




Guessing game:


Wonders of the world


<i><b>I. Vocabulary</b></i>
+Canyon(n)
+Ranger(n)
+Edge(n)


+Breathtaking(a)
+Temperate(a)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=159>

Hoa about his trip to the grandcanyon
on page 135



-T tells Ss to complete the letter by
inserting the letters of the missing
sentences (A, B, C and D)


-T calls on some Ss to read their
completed letters in front of the class
-T gives feedback and corrects


- T sets the scene:


<i>“Image you have visited a place</i>
<i>recently. Write a letter to a friend of</i>
<i>yours and tell him/ her about this</i>
<i>place</i>


-T draws the outline on the board and
elicit some details


-T has Ss talk about something they
have done first by asking questions for
them to answer


-T asks Ss to write the letter in their
notebooks


-T monitors and assists Ss if necessary
-T calls on some Ss to read their letters
in front of the class


-T gives feedback and corrects


<b>4. Post-writing</b>


-T asks Ss to use the outline on the
board and the information in their
letters to make an interview


-Model: call on a student to stand up to
answer the questions


-T asks Ss play in turn the role of an
interview and an interviewee


-T monitors and corrects


-T calls on some pairs to demonstrate
their interview


<b>5. Homework</b>


Answer key:


1. C 2. B 3. D 4. A


<i><b>III. Writing</b></i>


+ place (Phong Nha cave/ Cuc Phuong
National park …)


+ Distance (100km/ 12 hours by train/
…)



+ How to get there (by bus/ plane/ …)
+ Sights (beautiful/ breathtaking/ …)
+ Weather (temperate/ sunny/ cool/ …)
+ How you feel (happy/ relaxed/ …)


<i><b>* Interview</b></i>


Where have you just visited?
How far is it?


How did you get there?


What is it like?/ Is it beautiful?
How about the weather/


How did you fell?


-Do exercises in workbook


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=160>

<b>Date of teaching: 7 / 4 / 2011</b>


<b>Period 87 : </b>

<b>UNIT 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLD</b>


Lesson 5. LANGUAGE FOCUS


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to report what people ask and answer
about one of the world cultural Heritage of Vietnam



<b>II. Language contents:</b>


1. Grammar: Passive forms


Indirect questions with if and where
Question words before to infinitives
2. Vocabulary: review


<b>III. Teaching aids: </b>
charts, posters
<b>IV./. Procedure</b>


<i><b>A. Class organization </b></i>
- Greetings


- Checking attendance
<i><b>B. New lesson</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


<b>1. Warm up:</b>


-T has Ss remind the passive form in
the past simple.


- Ss give the form.


<b>2. Presentation & Practice</b>


-T. has Ss look at the exercise and


choose the right verbs in the box for
the gaps in sentences


-Ask Ss to complete the sentences with
the right passive form of the verbs
-Call on some Ss to give their answers
-Give feedback and correct


-Set the scene


<i>“Yesterday, Nga and Nhi talked about</i>
<i>My Son, one of the world cultural</i>
<i>Heritage of Vietnam. Beside</i>
<i>answering some of Nhi’s questions,</i>


S + V-ed/ v3 + O


S + was/ were + P.P (+ by O)


<i><b> Language focus 1: Complete the</b></i>
sentences. Use the passive form of the
verbs in the box


<i><b>Answer key:</b></i>
a/ was completed
b/ was constructed
c/ was designed
d/ was presented
e/ was reached





Production


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=161>

<i>Nga gave her some additional</i>
<i>information about My Son”</i>


-T asks Ss to report what Nhi asked
Nga, using reported speech


-T calls on some Ss to resay the use of
the Indirect yes/ no questions on the
board


-Model the first question and ask Ss to
listen


-T calls on one student to read the
question, another student read the
reported sentence


-T gives feedback and corrects if
necessary


-T goes on asking Ss to do the rest
questions orally with the same steps
-T calls on some Ss to go to the board
and write the reported sentences


-T corrects and asks Ss to write the


right answers in their notebooks


-T shows the word-cue chart on the
board


-T models the first sentence and asks
Ss to listen


-T checks if Ss recognize the model
sentence


-T asks one the student to say the next
sentence


-T gives feedback and corrects


-T has Ss do the rest of the exercise
orally with the same steps


-T asks some Ss to go to the board and
write complete sentences


-T gives feedback, corrects and has Ss
copy


-T delivers posters to Ss


-T writes the question words on the
board and asks Ss to write complete
sentences of their own.



-T tells Ss to write their sentences on
posters and put them on board after
finishing them


-T awards Ss good marks if their
sentences are right


<i><b>Example:</b></i>


a/ Do you know My Son, Nga?




Nhi asked Nga if/ whether she knew My
Son


*Answer key:


b/ Nhi asked Nga if/ whether My Son was
in Quang Nm province


c/ Nhi asked Nga if it was far from HaNoi
d/ Nhi asked Nga if many people lived at
My Son


e/ Nhi asked Nga if many tourist visited
My Son every year


f/ Nhi asked Nga if Nga wanted to visit


My Son one day


<i><b> Language focus 3: Nga answered Nhi’s</b></i>
questions. She then gave Nhi some
additional information. Use the words to
write the information that Nga gave to
Nhi.


a/ tell/ how/ go there




<i>Nga told Nhi how to go there</i>


<b></b>


<b> S + V+ question word + to-inf</b>
*Answer key:


a/ Nga told Nhi how to go there


b/ Nga showed Nhi where to get tickets
c/ Nga pointed out where to buy souvenirs
d/ Nga advised Nhi how to go from My
Son to Hoi An


e/ Nga told what to do there during the
visit


<i><b> Language focus 4: </b></i> Complete the


passage. Use either to-infinitive or the
bare infinitive form of the verbs in
brackets.


1. I want to go out at weekend
To-infinitive


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=162>

-T elicits the target language from Ss
-T gets Ss to copy


-T asks Ss to open their books and
complete the passage on 137 with the
right form of the verbs


-T calls on some Ss to give their
answers


-T corrects and has a student read the
whole paragraph aloud


<b>3. Consolidation:</b>


T has Ss ask their friends some Yes/
No questions and then reported them.


<b>4. Homework</b>


V-ing


3. He can speak many language




Modal verbs bare inf
*Concept check


1. Forms: S + V + To-inf


Use: Most of the verbs in English are
followed by a to-inf


2. Form: S + V + V-ing


3. Form: S + Modal verbs + bare inf
Use: Modals: can, could, will, would,
shall, should, may, might, must


<b>* The answer:</b>


(1) to jog, (2) go, (3) to gather, (4) to rain,
(5) to reach, (6) to continue, (7) get.


Ex. Does your father work on the farm,
Ngoc?


I asked Ngoc if her father worked on
the farm.


-Turn the passive sentences in language
focus 1 into the active voice



-Do exercise in workbook
-Prepare: Review knowledge


<b>Date of teaching: 9 / 4 / 2011</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=163>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


Ss will be able to consolidate their knowledge of the past progressive tense and
the passive voice in the past simple tense.


<b>II. Language contents</b>


1. Grammar: The past simple tense


Passive voice in the past simple tense
2. Vocabulary: review


<b>III. Teaching methods: </b>
Suggestion


<b>IV. Teaching aids: </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=164>

<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
<b>1. Warm up:</b>


- T has Ss remind the formation and
the usages of the past progressive
tense.


- Ss remind the formation and the


usages of the past progressive tense.


<b>2. Presentation & Practice:</b>


- T gives exercise 1 and has Ss do it.
- Ss complete the sentences. Then give
the answer on the board.


- T corrects if necessary.


a. Formation:


S + were/ was + V-ing
b. Usages:


- Expressing the action happening at a
certain time in the past.


- Expressing the action which was


happening in the past and another action
cut it.


<i><b>Exercise 1: Put the verbs in the past</b></i>
progressive tense or the past simple tense:
a. Nam (play) soccer at 4.30 yesterday
afternoon.


b. While Mr. Thanh (visit) the Statue of
Liberty, Mrs. Quyen (go) shopping.



c. The phone (ring) while my father (read).
d. I (go) to the movies at 7 o’clock last
night.


e. When she (come), we (watch) TV.
f. Lan (write) a letter at 9 last night.


g. They (have) breakfast at 6.45 yesterday
morning.


<b>Answer:</b>
a. was playing


b. was visiting… went
c. rang.. was reading
d. was going


e. came… were watching
f. was writing


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=165>

<b>Date of teaching : 14/4/2011</b> <b> </b>
<b>Period : 89 </b>


<b>WRITTEN TEST </b>



I<b>/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, teacher will be able to check students’ knowledge form Unit
12 to Unit 14



<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


 Grammar : - Tenses - Passive forms


- Reported speech - Question words followed by “to – infinitives”


<sub></sub> Vocabulary :


<b>III. </b>


<b> Teaching aids</b> : Photocopied Tests


<b>IV/ Procedures</b><i> :</i><b> </b>


<i><b>A. Class organization: </b></i>
- Greetings:


- Checking attendance:
<i><b>B. New lesson:</b></i>


I/ Circle the word that has different pronunciation from that of the others.


1. <sub>A. h</sub><b><sub>a</sub></b><sub>te</sub> <sub>B. st</sub><b><sub>a</sub></b><sub>tue</sub> <sub>C. d</sub><b><sub>a</sub></b><sub>nger</sub> <sub>D. pl</sub><b><sub>a</sub></b><sub>ne</sub>


2. <sub>A. </sub><b><sub>a</sub></b><sub>rrive</sub> <sub>B. </sub><b><sub>a</sub></b><sub>round</sub> <sub>C. v </sub><b><sub>a</sub></b><sub>lley</sub> <sub>D. </sub><b><sub>a</sub></b><sub>broad</sub>


3. <sub>A. Chicag</sub><b><sub>o</sub></b> <sub>B. sn</sub><b><sub>o</sub></b><sub>wy</sub> <sub>C. c</sub><b><sub>o</sub></b><sub>ld</sub> <sub>D. pris</sub><b><sub>o</sub></b><sub>n </sub>


4. <sub>A. h</sub><b><sub>o</sub></b><sub>ld</sub> <sub>B. cl</sub><b><sub>o</sub></b><sub>thes</sub> <sub>C. n</sub><b><sub>o</sub></b><sub>thing </sub> <sub>D. t</sub><b><sub>o</sub></b><sub>ld</sub>



5. <sub>A. res</sub><b><sub>c</sub></b><sub>ue</sub> <sub>B. </sub><b><sub>c</sub></b><sub>ity</sub> <sub>C. re</sub><b><sub>c</sub></b><sub>ent</sub> <sub>D. </sub><b><sub>c</sub></b><sub>entury</sub>


<i><b>II/ Choose the best option A, B, C, or D </b></i>


6. Christmas songs ...for people ceturies ago.


A. were performed B. are performed C. performed D. was performed
7. The park ranger talked about the...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=166>

A. where B. what C. whether D. which
9. Would you mind ... the windows?


A. closed B. closing C. to closing D. to close


10.Two team members have to make fire in a ...


A. fire making contest B. making fire contest


C. contest for making fire D. contest of making fire
11.We ...dinner when Hoa came.


A. are having B. have had C. had D. were having


12.Yesterday I went to the market and ...some vegetables.


A. buy B. buyed C. have bought D. bought


13.Angkor Wat is one of the largest ...in the world.



A. wonders B. temples C. churches D. pagodas


14. She said she ... a worker in a large factory.


A. is B. has been C. was D. will be


15.He said he ...the faucets in our house.


A. can fix B. could fix C. can fixed D. could fixed
16. "...to come and have dinner with us"-"I'd love to but I' m busy".


A. Would you like B.Would you mind C. Do you want D.Could you please
17. The report shows...the rice- cooking festival was held.


A. what B. in what C. which D. how
18. " How did Mrs Quyen go to Hawaii? "- " She...a plane ".


A. made B. did C. took D. fly


19. Our accommodation is...in the ticket price.


A. included B. concluded C. stayed D. picked
20. She told me how ....English words well .


A. learn B. to learn C. learned D. learning
<b>III. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in Standard English.</b>


21. The plumber told me how could fix the leak in the sink.
A B C D



22. The little girl stopped to cry when I handed her her doll.
A B C D


23. Paul tells me if I left my house unlocked.
A B C D
24. Don’t forget posting the letter I gave you.
A B C D


25. We get very boring with the same food every day.
A B C D


<i><b>IV/ Read the passage carefully:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=167>

<i><b>A. True (T)or False(F)?</b></i>


26 ……… Vietnam’s New Year is celebrated according to the Lunar calendar.
27 ... Vietnam’s New Year is known as Tet.


<b>B- </b><i><b>Answer the following questions:</b></i>


28. What do Vietnamese people usually do to prepare for Tet?


...
29 - Do people sit up to midnight to see the New Year?


...
30 - How long does Tet last?


...
31- Are the first three days the most important?



...


<i><b>V/ Rewrite the following sentences. Begin with the given words.</b></i>


32.They will build a new school in my neighborhood.


èA new school... ………
33.“Is Eiffel Tower in France?” Nga asked me


èNga asked me...
34.“I can play the guitar and the piano.” Ba said


èBa said...
35. They made the fire in the traditional way.


èThe fire...
36 .“I am going to see a movie this evening”. Hoa said


èHoa said...
37 . “ Can you speak Vietnamese , Mary ?” Nga asked.


èNga asked………
38- Nhi asked Nga: " Is Phong Nha Cave in Quang Binh?"


èNhi asked Nga ...
39- Nhi asked Nga:" Do you know My Son?


èNhi asked Nga ...
40. “ I’m very busy . I’ll ring you tomorrow ,” Susan said to me .



èSusan ………...
41. “ Do you live in the countryside?” The interviewer said to me .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=168>

<b>---Date of teaching : 16/4/2011</b> <b> </b>
<b>Period : 90 </b>

<b>TEST CORRECTION</b>



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


Students will be able to recognize their mistakes in the test and know how to
correct them.


<i><b>II. Language contents:</b></i>


Grammar & vocabulary: review
<b>III. Teaching aids</b><i><b> :</b><b> </b></i>


Textbook English 8, colored chalks,
<b>IV. Procedures</b><i><b> :</b><b> </b></i>


<i><b>A. Class organization: </b></i>
- Greetings:


- Checking attendance:
<i><b>B. New lesson:</b></i>


<i><b>I/ Circle the word that has different pronunciation from that of the others.(1mark)</b></i>


<i><b>1. B</b></i> <i><b>2. C</b></i> <i><b>3. D</b></i> <i><b>4. C</b></i> <i><b>5. A</b></i>



<i><b>II/ Choose the best option A, B, C, or D(3marks)</b></i>


<i><b>6. A</b></i> <i><b>7. A</b></i> <i><b>8. C</b></i> <i><b>9. B</b></i> <i><b>10. A</b></i>


<i><b>11. D</b></i> <i><b>12. D</b></i> <i><b>13. B</b></i> <i><b>14. C</b></i> <i><b>15. B</b></i>


<i><b>16. A</b></i> <i><b>17. D</b></i> <i><b>18. C</b></i> <i><b>19. A</b></i> <i><b>20. B</b></i>


<i><b>III. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in Standard English.</b></i>


<i><b>21. D</b></i> <i><b>22. B</b></i> <i><b>23. A</b></i> <i><b>24. B</b></i> <i><b>25. B</b></i>


<i><b>IV/ Read the passage carefully(2,5ms)</b></i>


<i><b>26. T</b></i> <i><b>27. T</b></i>


<i><b>28. They tidy their houses, cook special food, clean and make offerings on the </b></i>
<i><b> family altars.</b></i>


<i><b>29. Yes, they do</b></i>


<i><b>30. Tet(It) lasts ten days.</b></i>
<i><b>31. Yes, they are.</b></i>


<i><b>V/ Rewrite the following sentences. Begin with the given words. (2,5ms)</b></i>


<i><b>32. A new school will be built in my neighborhood.</b></i>
<i><b>33. Nga asked me if Eiffel Tower was in France.</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=169>

<i><b>35. The fire was made in the traitional way.</b></i>



<i><b> 36 .Hoa said (that) she was going to see a movie that evening.</b></i>
<i><b>37 . Nga asked Mary if she could speak Vietnamese</b></i>


<i><b>38. Nhi asked Nga if Phong Nha cave was in Quang Binh.</b></i>
<i><b>39. Nhi asked Nga if she knew My Son.</b></i>


<i><b> 40. Susan said that she was very busy. She wold ring me the following day.</b></i>
<i><b> 41. The interviewer asked me if I lived in the countryside</b></i>


<b>Date of teaching : 19/4/2011</b>


<b>Period: 91 </b>

<b>UNIT 15: COMPUTERS</b>



<b>Lesson 1. GETTING STARTED & LISTEN AND READ</b>


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


Ss will be able to express their opinions about a problem
<b>II. Language contents:</b>


1. Grammar: Review present perfect tense


2.Vocabulary: (n) printer, manual, socket, guarantee; (v) connect
<b>III. Teaching aids:</b>


Pictures in the textbook (page 142), realia, disk, chart
<b>IV. Procedures</b><i><b> :</b><b> </b></i>


<i><b>A. Class organization: </b></i>


- Greetings:


- Checking attendance:
<i><b>B. New lesson:</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


1. Warm up:


Brainstorm


-T writes the topic on the board


-T asks Ss to think of the topic and
express their opinions


-T collects Ss’ opinions and writes
them on the board


<b>2. Pre-reading:</b>


-T elicits words from Ss
-T reads the new words
-Ss repeat


<i><b>I. Getting started</b></i>


<b>Computers can help us:</b>
+ Save time …



Suggestions:


+ Computers help us learn interestingly
+ Computers help us learn more quickly
+ Computers are convenient / easy for
keeping / sorting information


+ Computer are very quick in giving answers
to our questions


II. Listen and read
<i><b>1. Vocabulary:</b></i>
+ printer (picture)


+ manual (explanation/ realia)


(a book coming with a machine tells you how
to use/ operate the machine)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=170>

-T has Ss copy


<b>Checking technique: Rub out and</b>
<b>remember</b>


-T sets the scene:


<i>“Nam and his father, Mr. Nhat are</i>
<i>talking about the problem of the</i>
<i>computer they’ve just bought. What</i>
<i>happens to the computer?”</i>



- T plays the tape


- Ss listen(open books) and repeat if
necessary.


-T puts the chart on the board and has
Ss guess which statements are true
and which are false


-T calls on some pairs to give their
answers


<b>3. While-reading</b>


-T asks Ss to open their books, read
the dialogue on page 138/ listen to
the tape


-T has Ss work in pairs again to
check if their guesses are right or not
-T gives feedback and corrects


-T has Ss copy the corrected
sentences


-T explains the words: “Fact and
Opinion”


-T gets Ss to read the statements and


check (ü) the suitable boxes


-T calls on some Ss to give their
answers


-T has Ss copy
<b>4. Consolidation:</b>


-T asks Ss to use reported speech to
rewrite the dialogue


-T divides the class into 3 groups and
assign each group to report about 3 "
4 sentences


-T has them write their report on a
poster and put it on the board for


+ guarantee (situation)


(The machine you buy at a shop will be
under guarantee from 6 to 12 months)


+ socket (picture/ realia)
<i><b>2. True/ False prediction. </b></i>
1. The printer isn’t working


2. Nam has already turned the computer on
3. Nam knows how to connect a printer but
he hasn’t connected it properly



4. The manual helped them to find out the
problem.


5. Mr. Nhat bought the computer in HCM
City and it’s still under guarantee


6. Mr. Nhat thinks the company wouldn’t do
anything with his computer because it’s too
far from his place.


<i><b>3. Practice the dialogue</b></i>


<i><b>4. Check True/ False prediction.</b></i>
*Answer key:


1. T
2. T


3. F " Nam knows how to connect a printer
and he has connected it properly


4. F " Mr. Nhat thinks it isn’t very helpful
5. T


6. F " Mr. Nhat thinks the company should
do something with it


<i><b>5. Fact or opinion? Check the boxes</b></i>
Ø Reading comprehension



+Fact: a thing that is known to be true,
especially when it can be proved


+Opinion: your feeling or thoughts about
someone or something, rather then a fact
*Answer key


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=171>

public check


<b>5. Homework:</b> -Learn the new word


-Do exercise in workbook


-Prepare: unit 15: Speak & listen
<b>Date of teaching : 21/4/2011</b>


<b>Period: 92 </b>

<b>UNIT 15: COMPUTERS</b>


<b>Lesson 2. SPEAK & LISTEN</b>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>


Ss will be able to use some common useful expressions to express agreement and
disagreement


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


1. Grammar: expressions used in expressing & responding to opinions.
2. Vocabulary: time-consuming, challenging, entertaining, adjust
<b>III. Teaching aids : </b>



Pictures in the text book (page 139), charts
<b>IV. Procedures</b><i><b> :</b><b> </b></i>


<i><b>A. Class organization: </b></i>
- Greetings:


- Checking attendance:
<i><b>B. New lesson:</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


<b>1. Warm up</b>


-T asks Ss each to think of one of the
ways computers are helpful and write it
on a piece of paper


-T calls on a student to the front of the
class


-T gets the rest of the class ask him/ her
-The student can only answer with yes or
no.


-T tells Ss the one to have the right guess
will get one good mark and go on
answering the classmates/ questions
2. Presentation


-T writes the topic on the board: useful


<i>expressions to express agreement and</i>
<i>disagreement</i>


-T puts the table on the board and elicit
Ss’ answers then write them in the table


<b>Guessing game </b>


“Do you think that …?”


“Do you think that computers are …?”


<b>I.SPEAKING</b>




Brainstorm


Opinion Agree
ment


Degree
of
Agree
ment


disagreeme
nt


I like




So do
I


I
agree,


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=172>

-T explains the phrase “on the other
hand” to Ss


-Get Ss to copy the table


3.Practice


-T puts the photocopied pictures (page
139) on the right of the board and the
words cues on the left (not in order)
-T asks Ss to match the words with the
pictures


-T calls on some Ss to go to the board to
draw the matching lines


-T erases the words but leaves the
pictures


-T gets a student to demonstrate the
model (a)



-T asks Ss to use the adjectives in the box
on page 140 to express their opinions
after going through the meaning of some
new words


-T asks Ss to use the pictures on the
board to practice speaking with their
partners


-T calls on some pairs to demonstrate for
the class


-T gives feedback and corrects


I don’t
like …
I think


I feel


I don’t
believe


I agree
You’re
right
Neithe
r do I



but …
Yes,
but on
the
other
hand


agree with
you


No, I think


<i><b>*Matching</b></i>


1/ Reading comic books d. <sub></sub>
2/ Playing in the rain a. <sub></sub>
3/ Driving a car b. <sub></sub>
4/ Foreign food c. <sub></sub>
*Answer key:


1/ b 2/ c 3/ a 4/ d




Picture drill
 Oral drill


T: I think driving a car is easy



P: I disagree. I think it’s difficult to drive
a car or so do I


- entertaining (adj)làm vui lịng


- time-consuming: tốn nhiều thời gian
- challenging: ['t∫ỉlindʒiη] kích thích
+ Suggestion


a. Driving a car
Learning to drive
a car


- Easy once we get
used to it


- Challenging/
difficult to get used
to driving in traffic
- Dangerous


b. Comic books
Reading comic
books


- Boring


- Interesting/ fun
- Time-consuming
c. Playing in the



rain


- Fun


- interesting
- Entertaining
d. Foreign food


Hamburgers,
pizza, French fries


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=173>

<b>Pre-listening</b>


-T puts the flow chart on the board and
has Ss copy it into their exercise books
-T gets Ss to understand how events are
sequenced in a flow chart and the
meanings of all the shapes used in the
chart


-T asks Ss to look at the flow chart and
guess the words in the gaps


<b>While-listening </b>


-T plays the tape (2 or 3 times) and asks
Ss to listen


-T tells Ss to fill the gaps with the


information they have heard from the
tape


-T has Ss compare the answers with their
partners


-T gives feedback and corrects
-T has Ss copy


<b>4. Post-stages</b>


-T has Ss write a set of instructions on
how to get a drink from a machine, using
the flow chart


-T presents the dialogue and has Ss
repeat, sentence by sentence


-T calls on one student to demonstrate
the dialogue


-Open pair


-Closed pairs: Ss make similar dialogues
referring the cues on page 140 (below the
dialogue) to replace the information
-T puts the mapped dialogue chart on the
board


<b>5. Homework:</b>



<b>II.LISTENING</b>


*Gap fill
Answer:


a. Do you have the correct change?
b. Yes


c. What do you want to drink?
d. Take it


<i><b>*Write it up</b></i>



I am having
problems with …


What’s wrong?
It doesn’t work. I


think …


No, You didn’t …
Oh! Sorry


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=174>

<b>Date of teaching : 23/4/2011</b>


<b>Period 93 </b>

<b>UNIT 15: COMPUTERS</b>


<b>Lesson 3. READ </b>


<b>I. Objective:</b>


Ss will be able to know more uses of computers.
<b>II. Language content:</b>


1. Grammar: Present perfect tense
2. Vocabulary: related to computers
<b>III. Teaching aids:</b>


Text books
<b>IV. Procedures</b><i><b> :</b><b> </b></i>


<i><b>A. Class organization: </b></i>
- Greetings:


- Checking attendance:
<i><b>B. New lesson:</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


<b>1. Warm up:</b>


- have ss work in groups and play the
game


- SS work in groups
<b>2. Pre-reading:</b>


- T introduces the text and gives new


words.


- Ss copy them down.
- T reads them carefully.


- Ss repeat. Then read in individual.
- T says the words in Vietnamese and Ss
say the words in English.


<b>3. While-reading:</b>


- Ss skim the text and check true or false.
- Ss discuss with friends. Then give the
answer.


- T corrects if necessary.
- T has ss skim the text again.
- Ss skim the text.


<b>Brainstorming</b>


<i><b>“How computers can help us:”</b></i>


<i><b>1. Vocabulary:</b></i>
-store (v)


-requirement (n)
-freshman (n)
-jack (n)



-restrict (v) hạn chế, giới hạn
-bulletin (n)/’bulitin/: thơng tin
-skeptical (adj)/’skeptikl/:hồi nghi
<i>Rub out and remember:</i>


<i><b>2. True or false</b></i>
* The answer:


a T


b T


c T


d F


e T


f T


<i><b>3. Answer:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=175>

- Ss work in pairs: ask and answer the
questions.


- Ss ask and answer the questions to the
rest of the class.


- T corrects if necessary.



<b>4. Post-reading:</b>


- Ss say how computers can help us.


- T asks some Ss: What do you usually
do with your computers?


- Ss answer.
<b>5. Homework:</b>


normally found in a library is now stored
in the university’s computers.


b. All the information normally found in
a library or messages normally found on
a bulletin board.


c. A computer and a telephone line.


d. With a bulletin board on the Internet, a
great number of people can get access to
the bulletin and exchange information
quickly.


e. Ss’ answer.


- Ex: - Computers save time.


- Computers helps Ss learn more
interestingly.



- Computers are easy for keeping
information.


- Ss’ answers


- Write the answer in the exercise book.
- Prepare the next part: Write


<b>Date of teaching : 26/4/2011</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=176>

<b>Lesson 4. WRITE </b>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>


Students will be able to write a set of instructions.
<b>II. Language content : </b>


1. Grammar: imperatives


2. Vocabulary: related to computers
<b>III. Teaching aids : </b>


Text books, pictures in the textbook
<b>IV. Procedures</b><i><b> :</b><b> </b></i>


<i><b>A. Class organization: </b></i>
- Greetings:


- Checking attendance:
<i><b>B. New lesson:</b></i>



<i>1. Greeting and taking attendance</i>
<i>2. Review of the previous lesson:</i>


Ss ask and answer the questions in the lesson <b>read</b>.


<i><b>* The answer:</b></i>


a. It has no library. All the information normally found in a library is now stored in the
university’s computers.


b. All the information normally found in a library or messages normally found on a
bulletin board.


c. A computer and a telephone line.


d. With a bulletin board on the Internet, a great number of people can get access to the
bulletin and exchange information quickly.


e. Ss’ answer.


<i>3. New lesson:</i>


<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


- T asks Ss some questions.
- Ss answer the questions.


- T presents the pictures on page 142 and
introduces the exercise.



- T has Ss work in group: match the
words with the numbers in the pictures.
- Ss work in groups.


- Ss give the answer.


- T and Ss correct if necessary.


- T presents the pictures on page 143 and
introduces the exercise.


Warm up:


- Do you have a computer?


Do you often use your computer? What
for?


- Ss’ answers


<i><b>*Pre-writing:</b></i>


Match the words with the numbers in the
pictures.


* The answer:


a) – 3 paper input tray
b) – 1 monitor screen


c) – 6 power button
d) – 2 icon


e) – output path
f) – 5 paper


<i><b>While-writing</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=177>

- T has Ss work in group: Write the
instructions on how to use the printer.
- Ss work in groups: Write the
instructions on how to use the printer.
- Ss give the answer.


- T and Ss correct if necessary.


- T ask Ss some questions: point to the
items in the pictures on page 142.


- Ss answer.


- Ss use the instructions to answer the
question.


printer.


* The instructions:


Plug in the printer and turn on the power.
Remove the old paper and load new paper in


the input tray.


Wait for the power button to flash.


Have the pages appear on the computer
screen.


Click the icon on the screen and wait for a
few seconds.


The printer paper will come out of the output
path in a minute.


<i><b>*Post-writing:</b></i>


- What is it (1)?


-> It is the monitor screen.
...


- How can we use the printer?


>Plug in the printer and turn on the power.
. . .


<i>4. Consolidation:</i>


T lets ss copy /complete the instructions


<i>5. Homework:</i>



- Write the instructions on how to use the printer in exercise book.
- Prepare the next part: Language focus




<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 15: COMPUTERS</b>


<b> LANGUAGE FOCUS</b>
<b>I. </b><i><b>Objectives:</b></i>


Review: Present Perfect tense with “yet” & “already”


Comparison of present perfect and past simple tense.
<b>II. </b><i><b>Language contents:</b></i>


<i>1. Grammar:</i> “yet” and “already”, Present Perfect tense, Past simple tense.


<i>2. Vocabulary:</i> review


<b>III. </b><i><b>Techniques:</b></i>


Silent reading; Pair work; Questions – answers
<b>IV.</b><i><b>Teaching aids</b>:<b> </b></i>


Chart; Flash card; Transparency sheets; Markers.
<b>V. </b><i><b>Procedures</b>:<b> </b></i>


<i>1. Greeting and taking attendance</i>
<i>2. Review of the previous lesson:</i>



Date:
Signature:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=178>

T checks ss’ instructions on how to use the printer (in exercise book)


<i>3. New lesson:</i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


- T shows the flash cards and asks
students to do matching.


- One student do the matching.


- T asks students to say what Ba has done
and what he hasn’t done (Books open)
- Students look at their books and say.


<i>- Ba has already done his homework.</i>
<i>- Ba has not tidied the room yet.</i>


<i>- Ba has already turned off the washing</i>
<i>machine</i>


<i>- Ba has already called and told Aunt Le</i>
<i>to have lunch.</i>


- T ticks or crosses on the flash card to
show what Ba has already done.



-T sets the scene:<i> Ba’s mother has just</i>
<i>been back from market. She wanted him</i>
<i>to do some housework while she was at</i>
<i>the market. Ba made notes in his diary</i>
<i>and checked the work he has done. Look</i>
<i>at Ba’s diary and complete the dialogue</i>
<i>using YET and ALREADY</i>


-T shows the transparency sheet of the
dialogue and asks 4 students to write the
answers on the board.


- Students write the 4 answers on the
board.


- T corrects the 4 answers and shows the
dialogues with answers using a
transparency sheet.


- T asks ss to look at the flight
information tables and asks questions to
show the modals


- T has students work in pairs asking and
answering about the flights.


* Pair - works.


-T calls some pairs to practice before the
class.



- Some pairs practice before the class
-T asks students to read the sentences
silently then check the correct column.
-Students do the task.


-T corrects the answers with students. T
may ask students to translate some
sentences to be sure they understand
clearly.


<b>*Warm –up</b>
<b>(books closed)</b>


<b>NEW LESSON</b>


<b>(Language Focus</b>)


<b>1</b>. <b>Complete the dialogue using YET and</b>


<b>ALREADY</b>:


<b>Answer:</b>


<b>Ba:…</b>I have finished it already


<b>Ba: </b>I haven’t cleaned and tidied it yet
<b>Ba: </b>I have (already) turned it off already.
<b>Ba: </b>I’ve already called and told her to have
lunch with us



<b>2. Work with a partner . Ask and answer</b>
<b>question about the flights. (Exercise 2 in</b>
<b>the text looks)</b>


<b>T: </b>Has the flight to Vientiane departed yet?
<b>S: </b>Yes, it has already departed.


<b>T: </b>Has the flight from Los Angeles arrived
yet?


<b>S: </b>No, it hasn’t arrived yet.


<b>3. Read the sentences. Check the correct</b>
<b>column (exercise 3)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=179>



- T puts the chart on the board and asks ss
to read the sentences.


- T asks ss to decide which sentence is in
the present perfect and which is in the
past simple.


-T calls 4 students to the board to write
the answers . Each student completes a
dialogue.


-4 students writes their answers on the


board.


-T calls some pairs to read the dialogue
with their own answers before class. T
corrects their answers<b>.</b>


-Some pairs of students read the
dialogues with their own answers before
the class<b>. </b>




-T corrects the answers on the board.
-T shows a table of some daily activities
using a transparency sheet and explains
the task.


-T can call a student to practice as a
model.


-Students work in pairs asking and
answering , follow the cues on the screen.
-T asks some pairs to practice before the
class.


<b>4. Complete the dialogues . Use the</b>
<b>present perfect or the past simple of the</b>
<b>erbs in brackets. (exercise 4)</b>


<b>Answer:</b>



1. Have…seen…
2. haven’t had
3. have been
4. Have…heard
5. happened
6. had
7. fell
8. broken


9. Have….arrived
…has (just arrived)
…did…arrive
…arrived…
<b>Production</b>


<i>4. Consolidation:</i>


T reminds ss of the Present Perfect tense and the Past simple tense


<i>5. Homework:</i>


Review the present perfect and past simple tense.


Read the dialogue on page 148 unit 16 to find out how to make chocolate.


---Finished


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=180>

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 15: COMPUTERS</b>



<b> LANGUAGE FOCUS + TEST 15'</b>
<b>I. </b><i><b>Objectives:</b></i>


Practice: Present Perfect tense with “yet” & “already”
Comparison of present perfect and past simple tense.
<b>II. </b><i><b>Language contents:</b></i>


<i>1. Grammar:</i> “yet” and “already”, Present Perfect tense, Past simple tense.


<i>2. Vocabulary:</i> review


<b>III. </b><i><b>Techniques:</b></i>


Silent reading; Pair work; Questions – answers
<b>IV.</b><i><b>Teaching aids</b>:<b> </b></i>


Chart; Flash card; Transparency sheets; Markers.
<b>V. </b><i><b>Procedures</b>:<b> </b></i>


<i>1. Greeting and taking attendance</i>
<i>2. Review of the previous lesson:</i>


T checks ss’ knowledge about Present Perfect tense, Past simple tense:
+How to use


+The difference in use between YET and ALREADY


<i>3. New lesson:</i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>



-T gives ss exercises
- Ss do the exercises.


-T calls ss to complete the sentences on
the board.


- Ss go to the board and complete the
sentences.


-T corrects if necessary.
- Ss copy.


<b> I. Complete the sentences with the Past</b>
<b>simple or Present Perfect</b>


1. What you (learn) seen you (come)? How
many new friends you (make)? I hope you
(meet, already) a lot of interesting people.
2. Since classes began, I (have, not) much
free time. I (have) several big tests to study
for.


3. Last night my roommate and I (have not)
some free time, so we (go) to a show.


4. I admit that I (get) older since I (see) you,
but with any luck at all, I (get, also) wiser.
5. Since the beginning of the twentieth
century, medical scientists (make) many


important discoveries.


6. Libraries today are different from those in
1800s. for example, the contents of the
libraries (change) greatly through the year.
In the 1800s, libraries (be) simply
collections of books. However, today most
libraries (become) multimedia centers that
contain tapes, computers.


7. Thank you for your very interesting
message, which I (get) yesterday.


8. I (buy) this printer in September but it
soon (develop) a fault<i>.(khuyết điểm)</i>


9. –You (sell) this scanner yet?
Week: 34


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=181>

-T gives ss exercises and explains the
requirement.


- Ss do the exercises.


-T calls ss to find the mistakes in the
sentences on the board.


- Ss go to the board and correct the
sentences.



-T corrects if necessary.
- Ss copy.


- My brother is asking about it. He’d like
to buy it.


10. – You ever (be) to a computer
exhibition?


- Yes, I (be) there once. I (go) there last
year with my father.


<b>II. Each sentence has a mistake. Find and</b>
<b>correct it.</b>


1. My man and I have been married for ten
years.


2. I stayed with my aunt what lives in Paris.
3. She was born in Barcelona, a city from
Spain.


4. Tom has studied for three years tourism.
5. I finished university with twenty-three
years.


6. We’ve had this car since five years.


7. Where have you been on holiday last
year?



8. I am never boring when I learn English.
<b>Answer:</b>


I.


1. …have you learnt…came…


…have you made ; …have already met…
2. …haven’t had… ; ...have had…


3. …didn’t have… ; …went…
4. …have got… ; …saw…
…have also got…


5 …have made…


6. …have changed… ; …were…. ; …have
become…


7. …got…


8. …bought…developed..
9. Have you sold../


Did you sell…


10. Have you ever been…
….have been…



…went…
II.


1. man > husband 2. what > who


3. from > in 4. Tom has studied tourism for
three years.


5. with twenty-three years > when I was
twenty-years old. 6. since > for


7. have you been > Did you go
8. boring > bored


<i>4. Consolidation:</i>


T reminds ss of the Present Perfect tense and the Past simple tense


<i>5. Homework:</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=182>

<b>TEST 15'</b>
<i>I- Match a word in A with a word in B.(3.0Ms)</i>


<b>A</b> <b>B</b>


1- screen
2- computer
3- printer
4- connect
5- mouse


6- socket


a- con chuột
b- máy in
c- ổ cắm
d- màn hình
e- máy vi tính
f- kết nối


<i><b>Your answer: 1-</b></i> 2- 3- 4- 5-
6-II- Fill in each gap with since, for, already or yet.(7.0Ms)


1- I’m hungry. I haven’t eaten lunch ……… .


2- That’s a very old car. I’ve had it ……… a long time.
3- She has come here ……… August.


4- I have ……… seen this film.


5- I expected the parcel an hour ago, but it hasn't come ………. .
6- We offer to help Tim with the bike but he has ... mended it.
7- The children are still watching TV. They haven't been to bed ... .


<b>ANSWER KEY</b>
I- 1- d 2- e 3- b 4- f 5- a 6- c


II- 1- yet 2- for 3- since 4- already 5- yet 6- already 7- yet


<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 16: INVENTIONS</b>




<b> GETTING STARTED & LISTEN AND READ</b>


<b>I. </b><i><b>Objectives:</b></i>


Ss can know the origin of paper and talk about the process of producing something.
<b>II. </b><i><b>Language contents:</b></i>


<i>1. Grammar:</i> passive voice of simple past and simple present tense


<i>2. Vocabulary:</i> (v) Remove, crush, liquefy, grind, manufacture
(n) Process, mold


<b>III. </b><i><b>Techniques: </b></i>


Slap the board, matching, grid, open prediction, quiz
Week: 34


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=183>

<b>IV. </b><i><b>Teaching aids: </b></i>


cassette, pictures (147-148), grid chart
<b>V. </b><i><b>Procedures:</b></i>


<i>1. Greeting and taking attendance</i>
<i>2. Review of the previous lesson:</i>


Ss give the formation of:


- The present perfect: S + have/ has + P.P
- The past simple: S + V-ed/v2



<i>3. New lesson:</i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


-T divides the class into 2 teams


-T tells Ss the team raising their hands
first (after the teacher finishes the
question) will have the right to answer the
question.


-Inform the questions:


<i>“Who was the inventor of ………?”</i>
<i>or “Who invented ………?”</i>


-T gets Ss to look at the pictures on page
147 and asks them some questions to
evaluate how much they understand the
pictures


-T asks Ss to read the sentences (A  E)
and match them with the correct pictures
-T calls on some Ss to give their answers
-T gives feedback and corrects


-Elicit words from Ss


-T has Ss copy



<b>* Warm up:</b>


<i><b></b></i>


<i><b> Quiz – Who did it?</b></i>


Suggestions


1/ Steam engine  Thomas Savery built the
first steam engine in 1698 and later Watt
improved it


2/ Light bulb  Humphry Davy, an English
scientist, in 1800


3/ Sewing machine  Isaac Meritt Singer
(1850)


4/ Aqalung  Jacques  Yves Cousteau in 1943
5/ Telephone  A. Graham Bell


<b>* Pre-reading</b>


<i><b>Getting started</b></i>


Suggestions:


-Where are they from? (picture a, b, c, e)
-What is the man in picture (a) doing?


-What is it? (d)


*Answer key:


A. b D. a
B. c E. d
C. e


<i><b>Listen and read 1,2</b></i>




Pre-teach vocabulary


- (to) remove use a flowchart
- (to) crush and Vietnamese
- (to) liquefy to elicit words


- (to) grind




to grind –ground
– ground


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=184>

-T puts the English words all over the
board


-T calls on 2 Ss or 2 teams of 4/5 Ss in
both sides of the class to the front of the


class


-T calls out the Vietnamese words and Ss
run forward to slap the English words on
the board


-Ss who slaps the right word first is the
winner and gets a point for his/ her team
-T sets the scene:


<i>“Tim Jones, Hoa’s American pen pal, is</i>
<i>visiting a chocolate factory with his class</i>
<i>and his teacher. Mrs. Allen. Now, guess</i>
<i>who will show them around the factory</i>
<i>and what they will learn from this visit:</i>


-Write the Ss’ predictions on the board
-T plays the tape and asks Ss to listen
while reading the dialogue on page 148
-T asks Ss to match the half sentences on
page 149


-T has Ss compare their answer with their
pictures


-T calls on Ss to give their answers for
the class


-T gives feedback and correct



-T gets Ss to write the full sentences in
their exercise notebooks


-T puts the grid on the board and has Ss
copy


-T asks Ss to read the dialogue again and
fill in the grid


-T calls on some pairs to go to the board


(Use the flowchart to explain the word)
- (a) process  manufacturing process
- (a) mold (realia/ picture …)


- conveyor belt (picture)


*Checking technique: Slap the board




Open prediction


<b>* While-reading</b>




Matching


*Answer key:



E a/ The beans are cleaned before being
cooked


D b/ Mr. Roberts thought Tim and Sam
were going to touch the button


C c/ After cooking, the cocoa bean smell
like chocolate


F d/ Sugar is one of the ingredients in
chocolate


B e/ Mrs. Allen warned Sam to leave some
chocolate for others


A f/ A sample of chocolate is given after
visitor have toured the fact4. Post-reading




Grid


CHOCOLATE MANUFACTURING
PROCESS


*Answer key:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=185>

to write their answers



-T gives feedback and correct 2/ The shells are removed3/ The beans are crushed and liquefied
4/ Cocoa butter, sugar, vanilla and milk are
added


5/ The mixture is ground, rolled and pound
into the molds.


<i>4. Consolidation:</i>


-T divides the class into groups of six.


- Groups describe manufacturing process of something they know.
- T chooses one group to report its ideas.


<i>*Ss use the content of the dialogue if they cannot describe any manufacturing process</i>
<i>they know</i>


<i>5. Homework:</i>


Rewrite the grid using sequence markers: first, next, then,…finally
Prepare Unit 16: Speak & Listen




<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 16: INVENTIONS</b>


<b> SPEAK & LISTEN</b>


<b>I. </b><i><b>Objectives:</b></i>


Ss can talk about the inventions using the passive


<b>II. </b><i><b>Language contents:</b></i>


<i>1. Grammar:</i> Simple present tense, past simple tense (review)


<i>2. Vocabulary:</i>


(n) Facsimile, reinforced concrete, microphone, X-ray, loudspeaker, helicopter


<b>III. </b><i><b>Techniques:</b></i>


Bingo, question and answer
<b>IV. </b><i><b>Teaching aids: </b></i>


Table of inventions (page 150)
<b>V. </b><i><b>Procedures:</b></i>


<i>1. Greeting and taking attendance</i>
<i>2. Review of the previous lesson:</i>


Ss rearrange these sentences as they appear in the dialogue
a. Mr. Roberts advices students not to touch the button.


b. Mr. Roberts shows the children the first step In the manufacturing process.
c. The children want to test some chocolate.


Key: b-a-c


<i>3. New lesson:</i>


Date:


Signature:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=186>

<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


-T has Ss study the meanings of the
inventions using Vietnamese


-T asks Ss to read the dialogue on page
148 again and pick out all of the
passive sentences


-T calls on Ss to give their answer
-T has Ss review the passive in the
present and past simple tenses


-T has Ss to read the model dialogue
on page 149


-T lets Ss know what they are going to
do: ask and answer questions about the
inventions to fill in the missing
information


-T ask Ss to look at the tables on page
150 and 156 and model the exchanges,
using a good student


-T has Ss work in pair, one looks at the
table on page 150 and the other page
156



-T asks Ss to ask and answer the
questions orally the fill in the missing
information


-T monitors and helps Ss if necessary
-T calls on some pairs to demonstrate
the exchanges


-T gives feedback and corrects
-T has Ss copy the complete table


I. Speak:




Pre-teach vocabulary
1/ Facsimile


2/ Reinforced concrete
3/ Microphone


4/ X-ray (n)
5/ Loudspeaker


6/ Helicopter




Grammar Awareness


*Answer key:


1/ This is where the cocoa beans are stored
(present simple)


2/ That button can not be touched (passive with
model)


3/ The beans are washed, weighed and cooked
here


4/ After the shells are removed … into molds




Word-cue drill


1/ T: What was invented by Friedrich Koenig?
S: Printing Press


T: When was it invented?
S: In 1810


S: Where was Koenig from?
T: He was from Germany


8/ S: What was invented by C.W.Rice in 1924?
T: Loudspeaker


S: Where is C.W.Rice from?


T: The USA


*Answer key:


<b>INVENTION</b> <b>DATE</b> <b>INVETOR</b> <b>NATIONALITY</b>


Printing Press 1810 Friedrich Koenig German


Bicycle 1816 Karl D. Sanerbronn German


Facsimile 1843 Alexander Bain English


Sewing machine 1845 Elias Howe American


Reinforced concrete 1849 F.J Monier French


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(187)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=187>

-Elicit words from Ss


-T elicits words from Ss and writes
them inside circles


-T gets Ss to repeat and rub out the
word, not the circle


-Continue until the circle is empty
-T gets Ss to repeat the rubbed out
words by pointing at the empty circles
-When Ss seem to remember all the
words, ask Ss (5/6 at a time) to come
to the blackboard to fill in the circles


with the right words


-T informs the topic: paper-making
process


-T has Ss read the sentences


-T plays the tape 2 or 3 times and ask
Ss to fill in the gaps with the words
they catch


-T asks Ss to compare their answer
with their partners


-T calls on Ss to give their answers
-T gives feedback and corrects


-T asks Ss to read the sentences (a "g)
carefully and guess the order


-T writes the Ss’ predictions on the
board


II. Listen:
<b>*</b>. Pre-listening


ØPre-teach vocabulary
+ procedure (n) (translation)
+ pulp (nu) (question)



(What is used to make paper?)
+ vat (n) (picture/ drawing)
+ drain (v) (explanation)


(to make sth empty or dry by removing all the
liquid from it)


+ roller (n) (picture)
+ roll (n) (realia)


àChecking technique: What and where


<b>*.</b> While-listening
ØGap fill


*Answer key:


1. simple 4. left
2. same 5. rollers
3. two hundred


*. Post-listening
ØOrdering prediction


Procedur
e


Drain
Vat



Pulp


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(188)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=188>

-T plays the tape again and ask Ss to
listen


-T calls on Ss to give their correction
-T gives feedback and corrects


*Answer key:


c/ Paper pulp was placed in the vat
d/ Paper pulp was mixed with water
a/ The water was drained


e/ The pulp fibers were poured out


g/ The pulp was conveyed under the rollers


<i>4. Consolidation:</i>


* A student acting as “caller” has the pile of separate pictures of invention, and offer
each one in random order, using the questions.


<i>When was the laser invented? And.</i>
<i>Who was the laser invented by?</i>


The group which possesses the item “laser” answer.


<i>The laser was invented by Gordon Gould in 1958</i>



And makes a tick beside the item on the sheet.
The winter is the first group to cover all its sheets


<i>5. Homework:</i>


-Use the information in the table to write 12 complete sentences in the …
-Prepare: Unit 15: Read


<b>Comments:</b>


...
...
...
...
...


* * * * *


<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 16: INVENTIONS</b>


<b> READ</b>


<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>


Ss can fill in the gaps and order sentences


<i><b>II. Language contents:</b></i>


<i>1. Grammar:</i> Past simple tense (review)


<i>2. Vocabulary:</i>



(n) Microwave, vacuum, toaster


<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>


Brainstorm, bingo, gap-fill, matching


<i><b>IV. Teaching aids: </b></i>


cassette, sub-board


<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>


<i>1. Greeting and taking attendance</i>
<i>2. Review of the previous lesson:</i>


No checking
Week: 35


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(189)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=189>

<i>3. New lesson:</i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


-T has Ss read the model dialogue on
page 149


-T lets Ss know what they are going to
do: ask and answer questions about the
inventions



-T elicits words from Ss or writes them
on the board


-T has Ss copy


-T gets Ss to brainstorm a list of 10
new words and write them on the
board


-T asks Ss to choose any 4/5 words and
copy them into their paper


-T calls out the words until someone
has ticked all of their words and shout
“Bingo” and wins


-T gets Ss some questions to help them
understand the reading more


-T has Ss match the headings to the
verses on page 152


-T calls on Ss to give their answers
-T gives feedback and corrects


-T tells Ss to read the sentences


* Warm up


T: What was invented by Friedrich


Koenig?


S: Printing Press


T: When was it invented?
S: In 1810


S: Where was Koenig from?
T: He was from Germany
* Pre-reading


ØPre-teach vocabulary: Brainstorm


Microwave


1/ Microwave (n)
2/ Vacuum (n)
3/ Toaster (n)


àChecking techniques: Bingo


Suggested words: microwave, vacuum,
hairdryer, dishwasher, telephone, toaster,
washing machine …


3. While-reading
ØMatching


+ What’s the 1st<sub> verse about?</sub>



+ Is the 2nd<sub> verse about the appliances used</sub>


in the kitchen?


+ What are “doom, chugga-chug, vroom,
boom”?


*Answer key:


+Verse 1: b. Appliances that cook food
+Verse 2: c. Appliances that clean or dry
things


+Verse 3: a. Instrument invented by
Alexander Graham Bell


4. Post-reading
ØGap-fill


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(190)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=190>

carefully and fill in the gaps with the
inventions taken from the poem


-T has Ss compare their answers with
their partners


-T calls on Ss to give their answer and
corrects


*Answer key:



1/ Vacuum 4/ Microwave
2/ Telephone 5/ Hair dryer
3/ Washing machine 6/ Toaster


<i>4. Consolidation:</i>


T reminds ss of the Past simple tense


<i>5. Homework</i>


-Do exercises in the workbook
-Prepare: Unit 16: Write
<b>Comments:</b>


...
...
...
...
...


*****


<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 16: INVENTIONS</b>


<b> WRITE</b>


<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>


Ss can use the sequence markers to describe a manufacturing


<i><b>II. Language contents:</b></i>



<i>1. Grammar:</i> passive voice


<i>2.Vocabulary:</i> words relating to papermaking


<i><b>III. Techniques: </b></i>


Jumble words, rub out and remember, gap fill


<i><b>IV. Teaching aids: </b></i>


pictures (p.153), cardboards


<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>


<i>1. Greeting and taking attendance</i>
<i>2. Review of the previous lesson:</i>


No checking


<i>3. New lesson:</i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


-T puts the cardboards with jumbles
words on the board


-T informs the topic: words relater to
papermaking procedure



<b>* Warm up</b>
àJumble words


1. =
Week: 35


Period: 99


lppu


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(191)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=191>

-T asks each group to write their answer
on a piece of paper to hand in


-T elicits words from Ss


-T asks Ss to close their books


-Rub out the new English words (one at a
time), point to the Vietnamese words and
ask Ss “what’s this is English?”


-when all the English words are rubbed
out, go through the Vietnamese list and
get Ss to call out the English words


-T asks Ss to read the text on page 152
and fill in the gaps with the right
sequence markers to describe the
procedure of paper-making



-T asks Ss some question to check if they
understand the text


-T calls on some Ss to read the complete
sentences


-T gives feedback and correct


-T has Ss look at the picture on page 153
-T asks Ss to think of the process of
chocolate making and put the pictures in
the correct order


-T calls on some pairs to give their


2. =
=
3. =
4. =
5. =
*Answer key:


1/ pulp 4/ drain
2/ roller 5/ fibre
3/ remove


<b>* Pre-writing</b>
—WRITE 1


ØPre-teach vocabulary



+ (a) log (drawing/ explanation)


(a thick piece of wood that is cut from a
tree)


+ flatten (v) (translation)
(to make sth become flat)


+ chemically (adv) (translation)
(treat in chemical process)


àChecking techniques: Rub out and
remember


ØGap fill


+ What is cut into chips?


+ What are chips mixed with before
they are crushed to heavy pulp?


+ Why is the passed through rollers?
+ What is the last step in paper-making?
*Answer key:


1/ First 4/ After this
2/ Then 5/ Then
3/ Next 6/ Finally
—WRITE 2



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(192)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=192>

answers


-T asks Ss to listen to check if their
answers are correct or not


-Ss read the statements aloud


-T gives feedback and corrects


-T asks Ss to rearrange the sentences on
page 153 according to the ordered
pictures


-T calls on Ss to give their answer


-T has Ss use the sequence makers to link
the sentences together in a paragraph
-T monitors and assist Ss if necessary
-T calls on some Ss to read their writing
for the class


-T gives feedback and corrects
-T has Ss copy


-T asks Ss to use the pictures and the
word cues on page 155 to write a
description of how white rice is produced
in the traditional way, using the sequence
markers



-T has Ss complete the sentences orally
first


-T asks Ss to write the paragraph in their
exercises notebook


-T monitors while Ss are writing and
helps if necessary


-T calls on some Ss to read their writing
-T gives feedback and corrects


1. d. The fruit harvest is fermented for
3 to 9 days to kill the beans and turn
them brown


2. a. The beans are dried in the sun
3. e. The beans are cleared in special


machines


4. c. The beans are roasted to bring out
the chocolate flavor


5. b. They are shelled and ground to
produce chocolate liquor


6. f. The liquor is made into chocolate
candy or cocoa powder



*Answer key:


6 – 2 – 4 – 1 – 5 – 3
<b>* While-writing</b>


ØWrite


*Answer key:


1/ d 4/ c
2/ a 5/ b
3/ e 6/ f


<b>* Post-writing</b>


ØWord cue drill (language focus 4)


*Answer key:


First, the rice crop is harvested. Then
the rice plants are threshed (to separate
the grains from the straw). Next (after
this), the rice grains are husked in the
mill to produce brown rice. After this,
the bran is removed in the mortar and it
is finally winnowed to produce white
rice


<i>4. Consolidation:</i>



T reminds ss of the Passive forms


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(193)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=193>

-Do exercises in workbook


-Prepare: Unit 16: Language focus
Comments:


...
...
...
...
...


*****


<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 16: INVENTIONS</b>


<b> LANGUAGE FOCUS</b>


<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>


Ss can change active sentences into passive ones and write Wh-questions in the passive


<i><b>II. Language contents:</b></i>


<i>1-Grammar: </i>Passive forms, sequence markers


<i>2-Vocabulary: </i>


(v) run a business/ company (translation)


around the corner = very near


due to = because of
(n) floor, zipper


<i><b>III. Techniques: </b></i>


Pelmanism, slap the board


<i><b>IV. Teaching aids: </b></i>


cardboards


<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>


<i>1. Greeting and taking attendance</i>
<i>2. Review of the previous lesson:</i>


No checking


<i>3. New lesson:</i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>
-T informs the topic: infinitive – past <i><b>* Warm up</b></i>


Date:
Signature:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(194)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=194>

participle



-T divides the class into 2 teams
-T has Ss copy


-T puts the English words all over the
board


-T calls on 2 Ss or 2 teams of 4/5 Ss in
both sides of the class to the front of the
class


-T calls out the Vietnamese translation
and Ss run forward to slap the English
words on the board


-The student slapping the right word first
is the winner and gets one point for his/
her team


-T has Ss review how to change an active
sentences into a passive one


-T has Ss to do exercise 1 on page 154
-T calls on some Ss to give their answers
orally for the class


-T gets some Ss to go to the board and
write the sentences


-T gives feedback and corrects



-Have Ss do exercise 2


-Ask Ss to compare their answers


-Call on some Ss to give their answers
orally then ask them to go to the board
and write the sentences


-Give feedback and correct




Pelmanism
<b>Infinitive</b>
Write
Draw
Sell
Win
Run


<b>Past participle</b>
Written


Drawn
Sold
Won
Run


<i><b>* Presentation</b></i>



LANGUAGE FOCUS
I. Pre-teach vocabulary


1/ run a business/ company (translation)
2/ around the corner = very near


3/ due to = because of
4/ floor (n) (situation)
5/ zipper (realia)


6/ xerography (translation)




Checking technique: slap the board


3. Practice




Language focus 1:
*Answer key:


a/ The document was typed by (Mrs.
Quyen)


b/ The computer was repair (by
Mr.Nhan)


c/ The picture was drawn (by Ba)


d/ The flights were turned off (by Hoa)
e/ The cake was baked (by Lan)




Language focus 2:


*Answer key:
a/ … was awarded


Run a business
Zipper
Around the


Xerography


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(195)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=195>

-Have Ss to do exercises 3


-Go through the underlined words with Ss
before have them write questions


-Get some Ss to give their answers in
front of the class


-Give feedback and correct


- T asks ss to use the pictures and the
word cues on page 155 to write a
description of how white rice is produced
in the traditional way, using the sequence


markers.


- T has ss complete the sentences orally
first.


- T asks ss to write the paragraph in their
exercise notebook.


- T monitors while ss are writing and
helps if necessary.


- T calls on some ss to read their writing.
- T gives feedback and corrects.


b/ … won …
c/ … ran …


d/ … was run … / was sold …
f/ … was closed (or closed) …




Language focus 3:
Eg:


a/ The zipper  what
b/ Maize  what
in the 16th<sub> century </sub>





when
c/ by Lewis Waterman  who
in 1884  when


d/ in Hungary  where


e/ in copying machines  in which
machine


*Answer key:


a/ What was invented by W.L Judson in
1893?


b/ What was brought in to Viet Nam by
Phung Khac Khoan? When was maize
brought into Vietnam?


d/ Where was the ball point pen
invented?


e/ In which machine is xerography
widely used?




Language focus 4:
Answer key:



First, the rice crop is harvested. Then
the rice plants are threshed. Next (After
this), the rice grains are husked in the
mill to produce brown rice. After this,
the bran is removed in the mortar and it
is finally winnowed to produce white
rice.


<i>4. Consolidation:</i>


T reminds ss of the passive forms and the sequence markers


<i>5. Homework</i>


-In Language focus 1,2: Turn the sentences into active if possible
- See: Grammar notes from Unit 9 to unit 10


<b>Comments:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(196)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=196>

...
*****


...


<b> </b>

<b>REVISION</b>


<b> </b>


<i><b>I. Objectives</b><b> : </b></i>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review and remember how to use <b>in order to</b> and



<b>so as to</b> to indicate purposes, make and respond to requests, offers and promises, form the


passive and in expressing their feelings using Adjectives


<i><b>II. Language contents</b><b> : </b></i>


<i>1. Grammar: -</i>Use can, could, will, would to make requests, offers, and promise.
- Review future simple.


- In order to, so as to.


- Passive in future simple / passive forms


- Adjectives followed by –an infinitive / a noun clause


<i>2. Vocabulary: </i>review


<i><b>III. Techniques</b><b> : </b></i>


Question and answer, eliciting


<i><b>IV. Teaching aids</b><b> : </b></i>


Pictures, Books, Real objects


<i><b>V.Procedures</b><b> : </b></i>


<i>1. Greeting and taking attendance</i>
<i>2. Review of the previous lesson:</i>



No checking
3. New lesson:


<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


-T asks ss to go to the board and write the
form


- Ss go to the board and write the form
-T corrects and remarks


- T gives examples
- Ss notice and copy.


-T asks ss to go to the board and write the
form


- Ss go to the board and write the form


1. in order to / so as to


In order to / so as to + V( bare – inf )
*express a purpose


Ex: He’s going to get to work earlier <b>in</b>


<b>order to</b> impress the boss.



He’s going to work harder <b>in</b>


<b>order to</b> achieve more.


The trees were planted along the
street <b>in order to</b> reduce traffic noise.
We crept up the stairs <b>in order to</b>
not to wake Jane.


2. Modal will to make requests, offers
and promises


Week: 36
Period: 101


<i><b>Requests:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(197)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=197>

-T corrects and remarks
- T gives examples
- Ss notice and copy.


-T asks ss to go to the board and write the
form


- Ss go to the board and write the form
-T corrects and remarks


- T gives examples
- Ss notice and copy.



-T asks ss to go to the board and write the
form


- Ss go to the board and write the form
-T corrects and remarks


- T gives examples
- Ss notice and copy.


Ex: Will/Would you (please) open the
door for me? (promise)


Will you carry that packet for me?
(offer)


He will pass his coming exam. He
promises. (promise)


3. Passive in future simple/present
simple :


Form : <b>S + will / shall + be + past </b>
<b>participle </b>


<b> S + am/is/are + PP</b>
Ex: Coffee is grown in Kenya


The letter will be written (by me)
The man was eaten by the shark.
4.<b> * </b>Adjective + to infinitive :


Form <b>: It + be + adjective + to </b>
<b>infinitive </b>


* Adjectives + that / noun clause :
Form : <b>S + be + Adj + that / noun </b>
<b>clause </b>


Ex: He was foolish to leave the
company.


You must be stupid to ask for
money.


He’s eager to help us in any way he
can.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(198)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=198>

<i>4. Consolidation:</i>


T reminds ss of the structures above


<i>5. Homework:</i>


- See: Grammar notes from Unit 11 to unit 12
<b>Comments:</b>


...
...
...
...
...



*****


<b> </b>

<b>REVISION</b>


<b> </b>


<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>


By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to review and remember:
-ed and –ing participles;


- “mind” in making requests;
-Past progressive;


-Progressive with “always”


<i><b>II. Language contents:</b></i>


<i>1. Grammar:</i> review: ed and –ing participles; “mind” in making requests; Past progressive;
Progressive with “always”


<i>2. Vocabulary:</i> review (unit 11-12)


<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>


Question and answer


<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>


Text book



<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>


<i>1. Greeting and checking the attendance</i>
<i>2. Review of the previous lesson</i>


No checking


<i>3. New lesson:</i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


-T asks ss to go to the board and write the
form


- Ss go to the board and write the form
-T corrects and remarks


- T gives examples
- Ss notice and copy.


<b>1.”-ed” and “–ing” participles</b>


<i>a. “-ed” participle</i>


Form :


Regular verb-ed past
Irregular verb - Column 3 participle
Use: A past participle (phrase) can be


used as an adjective to qualify a noun
Week: 36


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(199)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=199>

-T asks ss to go to the board and write the
form


- Ss go to the board and write the form
-T corrects and remarks


- T gives examples
- Ss notice and copy.


-T asks ss to go to the board and write the
form


- Ss go to the board and write the form
-T corrects and remarks


- T gives examples
- Ss notice and copy.


-T asks ss to go to the board and write the
form


- Ss go to the board and write the form
-T corrects and remarks


- T gives examples
- Ss notice and copy.



-T asks ss to go to the board and write the
form


- Ss go to the board and write the form


with passive meaning.


<i>Ex:</i> The decisions <i>made at today’s</i>
<i>meeting</i> will affect all of us.


<i>b. “-ing” participle</i>


<b>Form </b>: V-ing <sub></sub> present participle


<b>Use: </b><i><b>A present participle (phrase) can</b></i>


<i><b>be used as an adjective to qualify a</b></i>
<i><b>noun with active meaning.</b></i>


<i>Ex:</i> The man sitting next to Ba is my
father.


*Note: some adjectives also end in –ing
or –ed. These can be explain as follow:
-adjectives ending in –ing: describe the
effect that something has on someone’s
feeling and process or state that
continues over a period of time


-adjectives ending in –ed describe


people’s feeling


<b>2. “mind” in making requests</b>
Form:


Would you mind if + S +V(2/ed)..?
Would you mind + V-ing…?


Do you mind if+S+V(bare infi./-es/-s).?
Do you mind + V-ing…?


<i>Ex:</i> Would you mind if I opened the
door?


Would you mind opening the door?
Do you mind if I borrow your
book?


<b>3. Past progressive</b>
Form:


+) S + was/were + V-ing…?
-) S + wasn’t/weren’t + V-ing…?
?) Was/ Were + S + V-ing…?
Yes, S +was/were


No, S + wasn’t/weren’t


*Yesterday, ago, last (week, month,…)
are usually used.



*Past progressive + <b>when</b> + past simple
*Past simple + <b>while</b> + past progressive
Ex: I was practicing the guitar at 7 last
night.


<i>Ex: </i>I was practicing English at 7 last
night.


The door bell rang while I was
having a bath


<b>4. Progressive with “always”</b>


<i><b>Form:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(200)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=200>

-T corrects and remarks
- T gives examples
- Ss notice and copy.


<i><b>Use:</b></i> to express a complaint


Ex: You are always talking in class.


<i>4. Consolidation:</i>


T reminds ss of the structures above.


<i>5. Homework:</i>



See Grammar notes from Unit 13 to unit 14
<b>Comments:</b>


...
...
...
...
...


*****


<b> </b>

<b>REVISION</b>


<b> </b>


<i><b>I. Objectives:</b></i>


By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to review and remember:
- passive form;


- compound words;
-Reported speech


<i><b>II. Language contents:</b></i>


<i>1. Grammar:</i> review: passive form, compound words, reported speech


<i>2. Vocabulary:</i> review (unit 13-14)


<i><b>III. Techniques:</b></i>



Question and answer


<i><b>IV. Teaching aids:</b></i>


Text book


<i><b>V. Procedures:</b></i>


<i>1. Greeting and checking the attendance</i>
<i>2. Review of the previous lesson</i>


No checking


<i>3. New lesson:</i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


-T asks ss to go to the board and write the
form


- Ss go to the board and write the form
-T corrects and remarks


- T gives examples
- Ss notice and copy.


1. Passive form
Form: <b>S + be + PP</b>


*How to change from active to passive


Active: S + V + O


Passive: S + be + pp + (by O)
Week: 36


</div>

<!--links-->

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về

Tải bản đầy đủ ngay
×